all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 5.21 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.56 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.06 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 05 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Cover Letter(s) | March 05 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Report | / March 05 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Report |
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 5.21 MiB |
ENGLISH User Guide LG-V700 MFL00000000 (1.0) www.lg.com ENGLISH User Guide Screen displays and illustrations may differ from those you see on actual device. Some of the contents of this guide may not apply to your device, depending on the software and your service provider. All information in this document is subject to change without notice. This device is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due to the touch screen keyboard. Copyright 2014 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Google, Google Maps, Gmail, YouTube, Hangouts and Google Play are trademarks of Google, Inc. Table of contents About this user guide .........................5 About this user guide ........................... 5 Trademarks ............................................. 5 DivX HD .................................................. 6 Dolby Digital Plus .................................. 6 Important notice ................................. 7 Getting to know your device ............ 12 Tablet Overview .....................................12 Charging your tablet ............................14 Optimizing Battery Life .......................15 To extend the life of your battery .........15 To view the battery charge level ...........16 To monitor and control what uses the battery .....................................................16 Inserting a microSD card .....................16 Removing the microSD card ...............17 Formatting the microSD card .............18 Locking and unlocking the screen......18 Your Home screen ............................. 19 Touch screen tips ..................................19 Tap or touch .................................................19 Touch and hold ...........................................19 Drag .................................................................19 Swipe or slide .............................................20 Double-tap ..................................................20 Pinch-to-Zoom .........................................20 Rotate the screen .....................................20 KnockON .......................................................21 Home screen ........................................22 2 Customizing the Home screen .......... 23 Customizing app icons on the Home screen ........................................23 Home screen clean view .....................25 Quick access ........................................25 Returning to recently-used applications ..........................................26 Notifications .........................................26 Accessing notifications .......................... 26 Quick Settings on the Notifications Panel ..............................................................27 To rearrange Quick Setting options on the Notification Panel ........................27 QSlide apps on the Notifications Panel ..............................................................27 Using the QSlide apps ...........................28 Notification icons on the Status Bar ..................................................................28 Multiple Users ......................................29 Slide Aside .............................................31 Plug & Pop ...........................................32 Capturing a Screenshot ......................32 Using QuickMemo to capture a screenshot .................................................. 33 Using Capture plus to capture a screenshot .................................................. 33 Entering Text.........................................33 Entering special characters .................. 34 Google account setup .......................35 Connecting to Networks and Devices ...............................................36 Wi-Fi .....................................................36 Connecting to Wi-Fi networks ............ 36 Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a Wi-Fi network .................................... 36 Bluetooth ..............................................36 Turning on Bluetooth and pairing up your tablet with a Bluetooth device ....37 Send data using the Bluetooth feature ........................................................... 38 Receive data using the Bluetooth feature ........................................................... 38 SmartShare ..........................................38 Enjoying the content via a variety of devices ......................................................... 39 Playing/Sending ....................................... 39 Enjoying the content from Nearby devices ..................................................39 Connecting devices ................................ 39 Searching other devices........................ 39 Using the content from the Cloud ....40 Using the Cloud .......................................40 PC connections with a USB cable .....40 Transferring music, photos and videos using the USB mass storage mode ............................................40 Synchronize with Windows Media Player ..............................................................41 Contacts ............................................ 42 Searching for a contact ......................42 Adding a new contact .........................42 Favorite Contacts .................................42 Creating a group ..................................43 Managing an email account ...............44 Working with account folders ............45 Composing and sending email ..........45 Receiving emails ..................................45 Camera ...............................................46 Getting to know the viewfinder ..........46 Using the advanced settings ..............47 Taking a photo ......................................48 Once you've taken a photo .................49 Viewing your saved photos .................50 Video camera ..................................... 51 Getting to know the viewfinder ...........51 Using the advanced settings ..............52 Recording a video ................................53 After recording a video .......................53 Watching your saved videos ...............54 Adjusting the volume when viewing a video .....................................54 Multimedia .........................................55 Gallery ...................................................55 Viewing pictures ....................................... 55 Zooming in and out ................................56 Playing videos ............................................56 Deleting images and videos ................56 Setting as wallpaper ................................56 Slideshow ..............................................57 Videos ...................................................57 Playing a video ...........................................57 Music .....................................................58 Playing a song ...........................................58 Email .................................................. 44 Tools .....................................................61 3 Settings .............................................. 81 Access the Settings menu ..................81 WIRELESS NETWORKS .....................81 DEVICE .................................................84 PERSONAL ..........................................88 SYSTEM .................................................91 LG Backup ..........................................95 About backing up and restoring device data ...........................................95 LG Backup your tablet data ................96 Scheduling automatic backups .........96 Restoring tablet data ..........................96 Tablet software update .....................98 Tablet software update .......................98 LG tablet software update via Over-the-Air (OTA) ..............................98 Accessories ......................................100 Troubleshooting ................................101 For Your Safety ................................103 QPair ......................................................61 QSlide ...................................................62 QuickMemo ..........................................64 QuickRemote .......................................66 QuickTranslator ....................................68 Voice Mate ............................................69 Alarm .....................................................70 Calculator ..............................................71 Calendar ................................................71 Tasks ......................................................72 File Manager ........................................73 Voice Recorder .....................................73 Task Manager ....................................... 74 POLARIS Office 5 .............................. 74 Google+.................................................75 Voice Search .........................................76 Downloads ............................................76 Box......................................................... 76 The Web .............................................77 Internet.................................................. 77 Opening a page ........................................ 77 Searching the web by voice..................78 Bookmarks ...................................................78 History ............................................................78 Using QSlide ...............................................78 Chrome .................................................78 Viewing web pages ..................................79 Opening a page ........................................79 Searching the web by voice..................79 Syncing with other devices ....................79 Adding and viewing bookmarks .........79 Chrome Options menu .........................80 4 About this user guide About this user guide Before using your device, please carefully read this manual. This will ensure that you use your device safely and correctly. Some of the images and screenshots provided in this guide may appear differently on your tablet. Your content may differ from the final product, or from software supplied by service providers or carriers, This content may be subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of this manual, please visit the LG website at www.lg.com. Your device's applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. LG cannot be held liable for any performance issues resulting from the use of applications developed by providers other than LG. LG cannot be held liable for performance or incompatibility issues resulting from edited registry settings being edited or operating system software being modified. Any attempt to customize your operating system may cause the device or its applications to not work as they should. Software, audio, wallpaper, images, and other media supplied with your device are licensed for limited use. If you extract and use these materials for commercial or other purposes is, you may be infringing copyright laws. As a user, you are fully are entirely responsible for the illegal use of media. Additional charges may be applied for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services. To avoid additional charges, select a data plan to is suitable for your needs. Contact your service provider to obtain additional details. Trademarks LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Electronics. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. 5 DivX HD ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium content. DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. Notice: Open Source Software To obtain the corresponding source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licences, please visit http://opensource.lge.com/
All referred licence terms, disclaimers and notices are available for download with the source code. Dolby Digital Plus Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 6 Important notice Please read this before you start using your tablet!
Please check to see whether any problems you encountered with your tablet are described in this section before taking the tablet in for service or calling a service representative. 1. Tablet Memory You need to check your tablet memory and delete some data, such as applications, to make more memory available. To uninstall applications:
1 Tap 2 Once all of the applications appear, select the application you want to
> Apps tab > Settings
> Apps.
>
uninstall. 3 Tap Uninstall and OK to confirm. 2. Before installing an open source application and operating system (OS) WARNING If you install and use an OS other than the one provided by the manufacturer it may cause your tablet to malfunction. In addition, your tablet will no longer be covered by the warranty. 7 WARNING To protect your tablet and personal data, only download applications from trusted sources, such as Play Store. If there are improperly installed applications on your tablet, the tablet may not work normally or a serious error may occur. You must uninstall those applications and all associated data and settings from the tablet.
> Apps tab >
> Display > Lock screen > Select screen lock and select a 3. Using a Screen Lock Set an screen lock to secure your tablet. Tap Settings desired screen lock from Swipe, Face Unlock, Pattern, PIN and Password. You can create a Backup PIN as a safety measure in case you forget your screen lock. Caution: Create a Google account before setting a screen lock and remember the Backup PIN you created when creating your screen lock.
>
WARNING Precautions to take when using a screen lock. It is very important to remember the screen lock you set. You will not be able to access your tablet if you use an incorrect screen lock 5times. You have 5 opportunities to enter your unlock pattern, PIN or password. If you have used all 5 opportunities, you can try again after 30seconds. 8 When you cant recall your Pattern, PIN or Password:
< If you have forgotten your pattern >
If you logged in to your Google account on the tablet but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times, tap the Forgot pattern? button at the bottom of the screen. You are then required to log in with your Google Account or you have to enter the Backup PIN which you entered when creating your Pattern Lock. If you have not created a Google account on the tablet or you forgot the Backup PIN, you have to perform a hard reset.
< If you have forgotten your PIN or Password >
If you forget your PIN or Password, you will need to perform a hard reset. Caution: If you perform a hard reset, all user applications and user data will be deleted. NOTE: If you have not logged into your Google Account and have forgotten your Pattern, you will need to enter your Backup PIN. 4. Using the Hard Reset (Factory Reset) If your tablet does not restore to its original condition, use a Hard Reset
(Factory Reset) to initialize it. 1 Turn the tablet off. 2 Press and hold the Power/Lock Key + Volume Down Key on the right side of the tablet. 3 Release only the Power/Lock Key when the LG logo is displayed and keep pressing the Volume Down Key
. 4 Immediately press and hold the Power/Lock Key + Volume Up Key at the same time while maintaining the Volume Down Key pressed. 9 5 Release all keys when the Factory hard reset screen is displayed. 6 Press the Power/Lock Key to continue or either of the Volume Keys to cancel. 7 Press the Power/Lock Key once more to confirm or either of the Volume Keys to cancel. 8 Your device will perform a hard reset. WARNING If you perform a Hard Reset, all user applications, user data and DRM licenses will be deleted. Please remember to backup any important data before performing a Hard Reset. 5. Opening and switching applications Multi-tasking is easy with Android, you can keep more than one application running at the same time. There is no need to quit an application before opening another one. Use and switch between several open applications. Android manages each application, stopping and starting them as needed to ensure that idle applications don't consume resources unnecessarily. 1 Touch and hold the Home Key
. A list of recently used applications will be displayed. 2 Tap the application you want to access. This does not stop the previous app running in the background on the tablet. Make sure to tap Back Key to exit an app after using it. 10 To stop applications, tap Task Manager from the recent apps list, then tap Stop or Stop all. To remove an app from the recent apps list, swipe the app preview to the left or right. To clear all apps, tap Clear all. 6. When the screen freezes If the screen freezes or the tablet does not respond when you try to operate it: Press and hold the Power/Lock Key for 8 seconds to restart your tablet. Ifit still does not work, please contact the service center. 11 Getting to know your device Tablet Overview Power/Lock key Volume keys Front-Facing Camera lens Touch screen Camera lens Earphone Jack microSD Card Slot Charger/USB port Speakers NOTE: Make sure that the microphone is not blocked when recording a video or audio clip. 12 Front-Facing Camera Lens microSD Card Slot Earphone Jack Ambient Light Sensor Power/Lock Key Volume Keys Charger/USB Port Back-Facing Camera Lens Speakers Microphone Infrared (IR) LED Use to take pictures and record videos of yourself. You can also use this for video chatting. Keep it clean for optimal performance. Insert a microSD Card for storing files such as music, videos and photos. Allows you to plug in an optional headset for convenient, hands-free conversations. You can also plug in headphones to listen to music. Measures the surrounding light and adjusts the LCD brightness to provide a vivid screen. Press to lock/unlock the screen. Press and hold to turn the tablet on/off, restart it, activate/deactivate airplane mode, and change the sound settings. Allow you to adjust the media volumes. Press and hold both keys at the same time to access the QuickMemo feature. Allows you to connect the tablet and the USB Cable for use with the charger adapter, your PC, or other compatible accessories. Use to take photos and record videos. Keep it clean for optimal performance. Use to listen to the audio from the selected function
(e.g., music, videos, sound clips, etc.). Record your voice and is used for voice-activated functions. Used as a sensor for the QuickRemote app. 13 WARNING Placing a heavy object on the tablet or sitting on it can damage the LCD and touch screen functions. Do not cover the LCD proximity sensor with protective film. This could cause the sensor to malfunction. TIP!
Tap the Menu Key options are available. whenever you open an application to check what If the device is locked and does not work, press and hold the Power/
Lock Key for 8 seconds to turn it off. Charging your tablet A rechargeable Li-ion battery is used to power your tablet. A USB adapter, which is included with your tablet, is used to charge the battery. Before using your tablet for the first time, make sure the battery is fully charged. NOTE: Your device has an internal rechargeable battery. For your safety, do not remove the battery incorporated in the product. Warning! If the touch screen does not function while the tablets in the process of charging, this may be due to an unstable power supply. As a result, disconnect the USB cable from the device or unplug the USB adapter from the power outlet. 14 1 Connect the USB adapter and USB cable. 2 Plug the USB cable (as shown below) into the tablets Charger/USB port. 3 Plug the charger into an electrical socket. NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. Optimizing Battery Life You can extend your batterys life between charges by turning off features that you dont need to run constantly in the background. You can also monitor how applications and system resources consume battery power. To extend the life of your battery Turn off radio communications that you arent using, such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or GPS. Lower screen brightness and set a shorter screen timeout. Turn off automatic syncing for Gmail, Calendar, Contacts, and other applications. 15 Some applications you have downloaded may cause your battery power to be reduced. While using downloaded applications, check the battery charged level. To view the battery charge level 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Settings
> About tablet >
Battery. 2 The battery status (charging or discharging) and level are displayed on the top menu of the screen. To monitor and control what uses the battery 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Settings Battery > Battery use.
> About tablet >
2 The bottom of the screen displays battery usage time and also lists applications or services using battery power from greatest amount to least. Inserting a microSD card Your device supports the use of microSD memory cards of up to 64GB capacity. Multimedia contents can be saved in the microSD card. 1 Place your fingernail in the cutout and pull the memory card tray out. 16 2 Insert the microSD card into the slot with the contacts facing down. Carefully push the tray gently into the device. Removing the microSD card To safely remove the microSD card from your tablet, first you need to unmount it. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Storage >
> Settings Unmount SD card. 2 Open the microSD card tray and push the card in to release it. 3 Gently pull the microSD card from the slot. Warning! Do not remove the microSD card without unmounting it first. Otherwise, it may damage the microSD card as well as your tablet, and the data stored on the microSD card may be corrupted. 17 Formatting the microSD card Warning! All files stored on your microSD card are deleted when you format the card. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap Erase SD card (twice). 3 If you set an unlock pattern, enter it and tap Erase everything. The card
> Settings
> Storage. will then be formatted and ready to use. NOTE: If there is content on your microSD card, the folder structure may be different after formatting since all the files will have been deleted. Locking and unlocking the screen If you do not use the tablet for a while, the screen will be automatically turned off and locked. This helps to prevent accidental touches and saves battery power. When you are not using the your tablet, press the Power/Lock Key to lock your tablet. If there are any programs running when you lock your screen, they may be still running in Lock mode. It is recommended that you exit all programs before entering Lock mode to avoid unnecessary charges (e.g. web access, data communications). To wake up your tablet, press the Power/Lock Key . The Lock screen will appear. Touch and slide the Lock screen in any direction to unlock your Home screen. The last screen you viewed will open. 18 Your Home screen Touch screen tips Here are some tips on how to navigate on your tablet. NOTE:
To select an item, touch the center of the icon. Do not press too hard; the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick up a light, yet firm touch. Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you want. Be careful not to touch any other keys. Tap or touch A single finger tap selects items, links, shortcuts and letters on the on-screen keyboard. Touch and hold Touch and hold an item on the screen by touching it and not lifting your finger until an action occurs. For example, to open a contact's available options, touch and hold the contact in the Contacts list until the context menu opens. Drag Touch and hold an item for a moment and then, without lifting your finger, move your finger on the screen until you reach the target position. You can drag items on the Home screen to reposition them. 19 Swipe or slide To swipe or slide, quickly move your finger across the surface of the screen, without pausing when you first touch it (so you dont drag an item instead). For example, you can slide the screen up or down to scroll through a list, or browse through the different Home screen canvases by swiping from left to right (and vice versa). Double-tap Double-tap to zoom on a webpage or a map. For example, quickly double-
tap a section of a webpage to adjust that section to fit the width of the screen. You can also double-tap to zoom in and out when viewing a picture and when using Maps. Double-tap a word to highlight it. Double-tap can also activate the KnockON feature to turn the touchscreen on or off. Pinch-to-Zoom Use your index finger and thumb in a pinching or spreading motion to zoom in or out when using the browser, Maps, or when browsing pictures. Rotate the screen From many applications and menus, the orientation of the screen adjusts to the device's physical orientation. 20 KnockON The KnockON feature allows you to double-tap the screen to easily turn the screen on or off. Quickly double-tap the center of the screen to turn the screen on. Quickly double-tap the Status Bar, an empty area on the Home screen, or the Lock screen to turn the screen off. NOTE:
You can disable this feature in the Display settings. From the Home screen, tap Apps KnockON > tap the KnockON checkbox.
> Settings
> Display >
21 Home screen Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to view the panels. You can customize each panel with apps, downloads, widgets and wallpapers. The Quick Keys are available at the bottom part of the Home screen and provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. Status Bar Shows device status information, including the time, Wi-Fi signal strength, battery status, and notification icons. Application icons Tap an icon (application, widget, folder, etc.) to open and use it. Quick Keys Provide easy, one-touch access to the functions used most often. Menu Key Opens an Options menu with options that affect the current screen or application. This only applies when available, depending on the screen or application. Home Key Returns to the Home screen (or returns to your default Home screen canvas from any of the Home screen extension canvases). Touch and hold it to display recently used applications with access to the Task Manager application. Back Key Returns to the previous screen. Also closes pop-up items such as menus, dialog boxes, and the on-screen keyboard. 22 Customizing the Home screen You can customize your Home screen by adding apps, downloads, widgets or wallpapers. For more convenience using your tablet, add your favorite apps and widgets to the Home screen. To add items on your Home screen:
1 Touch and hold the empty part of the Home screen. 2 Tap the Apps or Widgets tab. 3 Drag the desired item to the desired location and lift your finger. To remove an item from the Home screen:
Touch and hold the icon you want to remove, drag it to finger.
, and lift your TIP! To add an application icon to the Home screen from the Apps screen, touch and hold the application you want to add and drag it to the desired location. TIP! You can add several app icons in a folder. Drop one app icon over another one on a Home screen, and a folder will be created. Customizing app icons on the Home screen You can customize each application icon with images from your Gallery. 23 1 Touch and hold an application icon until its unlocked from its current position. Then drop it on the screen. The editing upper right corner of the application. icon will appear in the 2 Tap the application icon again and select the desired icon design and size from the Theme icon tab. Or touch the Photo icon tab to take a new picture or select a picture from the Gallery. 24 Home screen clean view You can see the wallpaper without items on the Home screen by pinching out. Pinch in or tap the Back Key to see applications and widgets again. Quick access To view the quick access items, touch anywhere in the front key area and drag up. The following options are available: Voice Mate, Google Now, and QuickMemo. 25 Returning to recently-used applications 1 Touch and hold the Home Key
. The screen displays a pop-up containing the icons of applications you used recently. 2 Touch an icon to open the application. Or touch the Back Key to return to your previous screen. Notifications Notifications alert you to the arrival of new messages, calendar events, and alarms, as well as to ongoing events, such as downloads. From the Notifications Panel, you can view your tablets current status and pending notifications. When a notification arrives, its icon appears at the top of the screen. Icons for pending notifications appear on the left, and system icons showing things like Wi-Fi or battery strength on the right. Pending notifications System notifications Accessing notifications Swipe the Status Bar down to open the Notifications Panel and access notifications. To close the Notifications Panel, swipe the bar that is at the bottom of the screen upwards. 26 Quick Settings Bar Swipe to the right or left to scroll through the list. Tap an icon to activate/deactivate the feature. QSlide Apps Bar Tap to activate a QSlide feature. Slide to the left and right to adjust the screen brightness and volume. Quick Settings on the Notifications Panel Use the Quick Settings to easily toggle function settings like Wi-Fi. The Quick Settings are located at the top of the Notifications Panel. NOTE: Touch and hold an icon in the Quick Settings Bar to view the function's settings menu. To rearrange Quick Setting options on the Notification Panel Open the Notifications Panel, swipe the Quick Settings to the left, and tap
. To rearrange items, drag to the desired location. To add more icons, checkmark the desired functions. QSlide apps on the Notifications Panel QSlide apps are displayed in a bar on the Notifications Panel below the Quick Settings Bar. These icons provide a quick, convenient way to multi-task on the same screen (similar to picture-in-picture on a TV). QSlide displays a small application window on the screen that can be moved, resized, or made transparent. 27 Using the QSlide apps Tap any of the QSlide apps in the bar to activate it. When activated, the QSlide feature opens the application in a window in the foreground, allowing you to access other applications in the background. You can open up to two QSlide windows at a time. Notification icons on the Status Bar The icons listed in the table below are some of the most common ones. Icon Description Airplane mode Connected to a Wi-Fi network Wired headset Bluetooth is on System warning Vibrate mode is on Silent mode is on Battery fully charged Battery is charging DLNA is on 28 Downloading data Uploading data An alarm is set SmartShare music playing GPS is on Data is syncing New Gmail message New Hangouts message A song is currently playing Tablet is connected to PC via USB cable or USB tethering is active Battery saver mode is on Slide Aside is on Multiple Users Only one tablet owner ID can be created, but multiple user IDs can be added so that others can log in and use the tablet independently. Each user can configure their own tablet settings, use their own storage space, and have their own app update privileges. 29 Tablet owner privileges Only the tablet owner ID can add a new user log in ID and remove user IDs. Only the tablet owner ID can access and use the microSD card. The tablet owner can uninstall any of the user's apps. Multiple tablet user limitations All users share the same battery, internal memory, and data usage with all of the other users. The language settings set by one user applies to all of the other users. Each user can configure and use only their own content and data (e.g.,Home screen settings, Sound settings, etc.). Any user can accept updated app permissions on the behalf of all of the other users. Alarms will sound at the set time no matter which user activated the alarm(s). Messages and scheduled calendar events will be sent to notify the specified user ID only. Once a user starts printing a document using Mobile Print, the print job will continue even if the user ID is changed. Data transfer, download, multimedia play, and communication services will stop if the user ID is changed. To add a new user on your tablet 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Select the type of user you want to add.
> Settings
> Users > Add user. User: Users have their own apps and content. Restricted profile: You can restrict access to apps and content from your account. 30 3 The setup wizard opens to help you add a new user. Touch Set up now. After creating a new user, that person needs to go through the setup process upon their first login. To switch users 1 Press the Power/Lock Key to lock the tablet's screen. 2 Press the Power/Lock Key once more to wake the tablet's screen. 3 Touch one of the colored icons at the bottom of the screen. Choose from the owner ID or any other user IDs you created. Slide Aside Slide Aside allows you to quickly switch between three open applications (or tasks) using a three finger gesture. 1 While an application is open, place three fingers on the screen and slide to the left. The current screen is saved and the Home screen appears. 2 To re-open the saved apps, place three fingers on the screen and slide to the right. Tap the desired app you want to open. 31 Tip! The Slide Aside feature does not recognize fewer fingers, additional fingers, or your palm. Plug & Pop Plug & Pop allows you to quickly choose apps to use when plugging in an earphone or On-the-Go device, such as a mouse or keyboard. 1 Plug an earphone or OTG (On-the-Go) device (i.e., mouse, keyboard, etc.). 2 The applications panel will display and you can select an app to run. NOTE: You can edit the applications to display on the panel and set not to show the applications panel. Setting up Plug & Pop 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap one of the desired Plug & Pop features and select the apps you want
> Accessory.
> Settings to make available. NOTE: Drag to rearrange the order of the available apps. 3 Tap to activate Plug & Pop. Capturing a Screenshot Press and hold the Volume Down Key and Power/Lock Key at the same time for 2 seconds to capture a screenshot of the current screen. To view the captured image, go to Apps folder.
> Screenshots
> Gallery 32
. Using QuickMemo to capture a screenshot On the screen you want to capture, drag the Status Bar downward and select QuickMemo OR Press and hold both Volume Keys at the same time. Using Capture plus to capture a screenshot This feature allows you to capture a portion of the screen in the default Internet browser. 1 Open the Internet app and navigate to the page you want to capture a screen shot of. 2 Tap the Menu Key
> Capture plus. Choose Crop photo or Crop picture and select Always or Just once. 3 Adjust the blue box to the desired size, and then tap OK. The selected area is saved to the Capture plus folder in the Gallery. Entering Text You can enter text using the on-screen keyboard. The on-screen keyboard appears automatically on the screen when you need to enter text. To manually display the keyboard, simply touch a text field where you want to enter text. Using the keypad & entering text Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type. Double-tap for all caps. Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. Tap to use the handwriting function. Touch and hold to access the keyboard settings and Clip Tray. This key changes depending on the last feature you use. 33 Tap to enter a space. Tap to create a new line in the message field. Tap to delete the previous character. Entering special characters The on-screen keyboard allows you to enter special characters (e.g. ""). For example, touch and hold the desired key (for example, the "a" key). After the desired character appears, slide your finger over it and lift it off to enter it. NOTE: A symbol at the top right corner of a key indicates that additional characters are available. 34 Google account setup When you first turn on your tablet, you have the opportunity to activate the network, to sign into your Google Account and select how you want to use certain Google services. To set up your Google account Sign into a Google Account from the prompted setup screen. OR From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Settings Accounts & sync > Add account > Google.
>
. Otherwise, touch New and enter the necessary If you have a Google account, touch Existing, enter your email address and password, then touch information to create a new Google Account. Once you have set up your Google account on your tablet, your tablet automatically synchronizes with your Google account on the Web. Your contacts, Gmail messages, Calendar events and other information from these applications and services on the Web are synchronized with your tablet.
(This will depend on your synchronization settings.) After signing in, you can use Gmail and take advantage of Google services on your tablet. 35 Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi With Wi-Fi, you can use high-speed Internet access within the coverage of the wireless access point (AP). Enjoy wireless Internet using Wi-Fi, without extra charges. Connecting to Wi-Fi networks To use Wi-Fi on your tablet, you need to access a wireless access point or hotspot. Some access points are open and you can simply connect to them. Others are hidden or use security features; you must configure your tablet to be able to connect to them. Turn off Wi-Fi when you're not using it to extend the life of your battery. Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a Wi-Fi network 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap 3 Tap Search to see a list of active and in-range Wi-Fi networks.
> Wi-Fi. to turn Wi-Fi on and start scanning for available Wi-Fi networks.
> Apps tab > Settings Secured networks are indicated by a lock icon. 4 Touch a network to connect to it. If the network is secured, you are prompted to enter a password or other credentials. (Ask your network administrator for details) 5 The Status Bar displays icons that indicate your Wi-Fi status. Bluetooth You can use Bluetooth to send data by running a corresponding application, but not from the Bluetooth menu as on most other mobile phones. 36 NOTE:
LG is not responsible for the loss, interception or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth wireless feature. Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. Turning on Bluetooth and pairing up your tablet with a Bluetooth device You must pair your device with another device before you connect to it. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
>
> Apps tab > Settings Bluetooth. 2 Tap the Bluetooth switch 3 Tap the check box next to your tablet's name to make your tablet visible to to turn it on. other Bluetooth devices. NOTE: To select the length of time that your device will be visible, tap the Menu Key
> Visibility timeout. 4 A list of available devices will be displayed. Tap the device you want to pair with from the list. NOTE: Depending on the type of device, you may have to enter matching codes, confirm matching codes, or the devices may automatically pair. Once pairing is successful, your tablet will connect to the other device. 37 NOTE: Your tablet doesn't support Handsfree Profile. Therefore, the use of call features with some of accessories, such as Bluetooth headsets or Bluetooth-enabled devices, may not be available for this device. Send data using the Bluetooth feature 1 Open the item and tap OR Touch and hold the item and select Share. OR Open the item and tap the Menu Key 2 Tap Bluetooth to share via Bluetooth.
> Share. NOTE: The method for selecting an option may vary by data type. 3 Search for and pair with a Bluetooth-enabled device. Receive data using the Bluetooth feature 1 Refer to the Bluetooth device's user guide to send a file to your phone. Both devices must be paired and Bluetooth must be on. 2 Pair the devices and tap Accept when you receive a Bluetooth Authorization Request to accept the file(s). SmartShare You can use the SmartShare feature easily in the Gallery, Music, Video apps, and others. 38 Enjoying the content via a variety of devices You can share your tablet's content with a variety devices. Tap the content in the Gallery, Music, Videos, POLARIS Viewer 5 apps. Playing/Sending Play You can play the content via a TV, a Bluetooth speaker or etc. Beam You can send the content to the device of Bluetooth and SmartShare Beam supported. SmartShare Beam This allows to transfer the content feature fast via to share Wi-Fi Direct.
< Play >
< Beam >
Enjoying the content from Nearby devices You can enjoy the content from nearby devices (i.e. PC, NAS, Mobile) in the Gallery, Music, Videos apps. Connecting devices Connect your device and other devices supported by DLNA in the same Wi-Fi network. Searching other devices Tap Nearby devices, then you can see the DLNA-supported devices. Connect to the device to view the content. 39 Using the content from the Cloud You can use the content from the cloud (i.e., Dropbox) in the Gallery, Music, Videos apps. Using the Cloud NOTE: The supported features may vary depending on the cloud. Retrieving data may take some time depending on the cloud. 1 Select Cloud in the Gallery, Music, Videos apps. 2 Select the cloud what you want to use and log in. 3 You can use the content of the cloud after logging in. 4 Set the cloud settings to select the app to use the cloud. PC connections with a USB cable You can connect your tablet to your PC to charge it, transfer items to the PC from the tablet and vice versa. Transferring music, photos and videos using the USB mass storage mode 1 Connect your tablet to a PC using a USB cable. 2 If you haven't installed the LG Android Platform Driver on your PC, you will need to manually change the settings. From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key
> System settings > PCconnection > Select USB connection method > Media sync (MTP). 3 You can now view the mass storage content on your PC and transfer the files. 40 Synchronize with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC. 1 Use the USB cable to connect the tablet to a PC on which Windows Media Player has been installed. 2 Select the Media sync (MTP) option. 3 When connected, a pop-up window will appear on the PC. Select the Windows Media Player option to synchronize music files. 4 Edit or enter your devices name in the pop-up window (if necessary). 5 Select and drag music files to the sync list. 6 Start synchronization. The following requirements must be satisfied to synchronize with Windows Media Player. Items OS Requirement Microsoft Windows XP SP2, Vista or higher Window Media Player version Windows Media Player 10 or higher If the Windows Media Player version is older than 10, install version 10 or newer. 41 Contacts You can add contacts on your tablet and synchronize them with the contacts in your Google Account or other accounts that support syncing contacts. Searching for a contact 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap the Search contacts box and enter the contact's name. You can also tap a letter along the left side of the screen to access names starting with the chosen letter. to open your contact list. Adding a new contact 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap the 3 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, tap
. Select the desired account (if applicable). Choose from Take photo to take a picture using the camera or Select from Gallery. Then browse for an image and select it. to enter more specific name information. 4 Tap 5 Enter the details about your contact. 6 Tap Save. Favorite Contacts You can classify frequently called contacts as favorites. To add a contact to your favorites 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap a contact to view its details. to open your contacts. 42 3 Tap the star to the right of the contacts name. The star turns gold and the contact is added to your favorites. To remove a contact from your favorites list 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap the Favorites tab to view your favorite contacts. 3 Tap a contact to view its details. 4 Tap the gold star to the right of the contacts name. The star turns grey to open your contacts. and the contact is removed from your favorites. Creating a group 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Touch the Groups tab 3 Enter a name for the new group.
, then touch to open your contacts. Tap Add members to add contact entries to your new group. Tap the ACCOUNT field to change the account(s) you want to save the new group to. 4 Touch Save to save the group. NOTE: If you delete a group, the contacts assigned to that group will not be lost. They will remain in your contacts. 43 Email You can use the Email application to read emails from services like Yahoo!, MSN, and AOL. The Email application supports the following account types:
POP3, IMAP and Exchange. Your service provider or system administrator can provide you with the account settings you need. Managing an email account Tap the Email on the Home screen. The first time you open the Email application, a set-up wizard opens to help you to set up an email account. After the initial setup, the contents of your inbox are displayed. If you have added more than one account, you can switch among accounts. To add another email account:
Open the Email application and tap the Menu Key To switch between accounts:
If you've added more than one account, you can easily switch between them. From any email folder, tap the current account (at the top of the screen), then tap the account you want to access. To change an E-mail accounts settings:
Open the E-mail application and tap the Menu Key General settings to configure settings that apply to all of your accounts. Tap an individual account to configure settings only for that particular account. To delete an email account:
Open the Email application and tap the Menu Key
> Settings > Menu
> Settings >
> Settings >
.
> Remove account > touch an account you want to delete >
Key Remove > Yes. 44 Working with account folders Open the E-mail application and tap the Menu Key Each account has an Inbox, Outbox, Sent and Drafts folder. Depending on the features supported by your accounts service provider, you may have additional folders. and select Folders. Composing and sending email 1 While in the Email application, tap Compose 2 Enter an address for the messages intended recipient. As you enter
. text, matching addresses will be proposed from your Contacts. Separate multiple addresses using semicolons. to attach files, if required. 3 Tap Attach 4 Enter the subject and your message. 5 Tap Send to send the message. If you arent connected to a network, for example, if youre working in airplane mode, the messages that you send will be stored in your Outbox folder until you connect to a network again. If it contains any pending messages, the Outbox will be displayed on the Accounts screen. Receiving emails When a new email arrives in your Inbox, you'll be notified by a sound or vibration (depending on your sound and vibration settings) and its notification icon appears on the Status Bar. 45 Camera To open the Camera application, tap Camera on the Home screen. Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera Switch between the back-facing camera lens and the frontfacing camera lens. Shot mode Allows you to choose a shot mode to define how the picture will be taken. Settings Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on the following page. Video mode Tap (or slide) to toggle between Camera mode and Video mode. Capture Takes a picture. Gallery Touch to view the last photo you captured. This enables you to access your Gallery and view saved photos while in camera mode. NOTE: Please ensure the camera lens is clean before taking pictures. 46 Using the advanced settings In the viewfinder, tap option, tap the Back Key
. to open the advanced options. After selecting the Take photos by voice command. Defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the photo. Sets the focus mode. Selects photo resolution. If you choose a high resolution, the file size will increase, which means you will be able to store fewer photos in the memory. The ISO rating determines the sensitivity of the camera's light sensor. The higher the ISO, the more sensitive the camera. This is useful in darker conditions when you cannot use the flash. Improves color quality in various lighting conditions. Applies artistic effects to your pictures. Sets a delay after the capture button is pressed. This is ideal if you want to be in the photo. Activate this to use your tablet's location-based services. Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location. If you upload tagged pictures to a blog that supports geo-tagging, you can see the pictures displayed on a map. NOTE: This function is only available when GPS is turned on. Selects a shutter sound. 47 Set to use the Volume Key for capturing pictures or zooming. This sets the location where you want to save your pictures. Choose from Internal storage and SD card. Opens the help guide to know how a function operates. Restores all camera default settings. TIP!
When you exit the camera, some settings return to their defaults, such as white balance, color effect, and timer. Check these before you take your next photo. The Settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder, so when you change photo color or quality elements, you will see a preview of the changed image behind the Settings menu. Taking a photo 1 Open the Camera application. 2 Point the lens towards the subject you want to photograph. 3 A focus box will appear in the center of the viewfinder screen. You can also tap anywhere on the screen to focus on that spot. 4 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject. 5 Touch to capture the photo. 48 Once you've taken a photo 1 Tap the image preview at the bottom of the screen to view the last photo you captured. 2 Tap Gallery, then tap Always or Just once. Touch to share your photo using the SmartShare function. Touch to take another photo immediately. Touch to send your photo to others. Touch to delete the photo. TIP! If you have a social networking account and set it up on your tablet, you can share your photo with your social networking community. to open the following options. Touch the Menu Key Set image as Touch to use the photo as a Contact photo, Home screen wallpaper, Lock screen wallpaper or Wallpaper. Move Touch to move the photo to another album. Copy Touch to copy the selected photo and save it to another album. Copy to Clip Tray Touch to copy the photo and store in the Clip Tray. Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected photo. Rotate left/right Touch to rotate the picture to the left or right. Crop Crop your photo. Move your finger across the screen to select the area to be cropped. Edit Touch to edit the photo. 49 Slideshow Automatically displays a slideshow of all your pictures. Add location To add the location information. Print Allows you to print the picture. Details Displays more information about the picture. Viewing your saved photos You can access your saved photos when in camera mode. Just tap the image preview in the bottom of the screen and your Gallery will be displayed. 1 Choose the app to use to view and/or edit your photos. Tap Gallery or Photos. 2 Tap Always or Just once. To view more photos, scroll left or right. To zoom in or out, double-tap the screen or place two fingers and spread them apart (move your fingers closer together to zoom out). 50 Video camera To open the video camera, tap Camera the Video mode icon
(on the viewfinder) to switch to video mode. on the Home screen, then tap Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera Switch between the back-facing camera lens and the frontfacing camera lens. Record Mode Allows you to choose a record mode to define how the video will be recorded. Settings Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on the following page. Camera mode Touch and slide up this icon to switch to camera mode. Record Touch to start recording a video. Gallery Touch to view the last video you recorded. This enables you to access your Gallery and view your saved videos while in video mode. 51 TIP! When recording a video, place two fingers on the screen and pinch to use the Zoom function. NOTE: Make sure that the microphone is not blocked when recording a video or audio clip. Using the advanced settings Using the viewfinder, touch to open all the advanced options. Tap to set the size (in pixels) of the video you are recording. Defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the video. Prevents shaking while recording to get high video quality. Improves color quality in various lighting conditions. Choose a color tone to use for your new view. Activate this to use your tablet's location-based services. Set to use the Volume Key for recording video or zooming. This sets the location where you want to save your videos. Choose from Internal memory and SD card. Opens the help guide to know how a function operates. Restores all camera default settings. 52 Recording a video 1 Open the Camera application and touch the Video mode icon 2 The video camera viewfinder appears on the screen. 3 Point the lens towards the subject you wish to capture in your video. 4 Touch 5 A timer showing the length of the video will appear. 6 Touch on the screen to stop recording. once to start recording. TIP!
Tap Tap to pause the recording. to take a screen shot while recording a video. After recording a video Tap the image preview at the bottom of the screen to view the last video you recorded. Touch to share your video using the SmartShare function. Touch to record another video immediately. Touch to send your video to others. Touch to delete the video. 53 Watching your saved videos Access your saved videos when in video camera mode by tapping the image preview in the lower-right corner of the viewfinder. 1 In the viewfinder, tap the image preview at the bottom of the screen. 2 Your Gallery will appear on the screen with your most recent recorded video displayed. Swipe to the left to scroll to your other videos. 3 Tap the Play icon on a video to play it automatically. NOTE: You can view your videos in the Gallery, Photos, and Videos apps. NOTE: Do not to press too hard; the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick up a light, but firm touch. Adjusting the volume when viewing a video To adjust the volume of a video while it is playing, use the Volume Keys on the right side of the tablet. 54 Multimedia Gallery You can store multimedia files in internal memory for easy access to all your multimedia files. Use this application to view multimedia files like pictures and videos. From the Home screen, tap Apps You can manage and share all your image and video files with the Gallery.
> Apps tab > Gallery
. NOTE:
Some file formats are not supported, depending on the software installed on the device. Some files may not play properly, depending on how they are encoded. If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. Viewing pictures Launching the Gallery displays your available folders. When another application, such as Email, saves a picture, the Downloads folder is automatically created to contain the picture. Likewise, capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Tap a folder to open it. Pictures are displayed in order by creation date. Select a picture to view it full screen. Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image. 55 Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods to zoom in on an image:
Double-tap anywhere to zoom in. Double-tap again to return to fullscreen view. Place two fingers anywhere on the image and spread them apart to zoom in. To zoom back out, pinch them together or double-tap the screen. Playing videos Open the Gallery app displayed on video files. Tap an image to select it. Select the app to play it
), then tap Always or Just
(tap the Photos app once and the video begins playback. and select an album. The Play icon or the Videos app is NOTE:
When using the Videos app to play a video, slide the left side of the screen up and down to adjust the screen brightness. Slide the right side of the screen up and down to adjust the volume. When using the Videos app to play a video, slide the screen left or right to rewind or fast-forward. Deleting images and videos Use one of the following methods:
In a folder, tap then tap Delete. and select the photos and videos you want to delete, When viewing a photo or video, tap Setting as wallpaper When viewing a photo, touch the Menu Key
> Set image as and select Contact photo, Home screen wallpaper, Lock screen wallpaper or Wallpaper.
, then tap Yes to confirm. 56 Slideshow You can view your photos in a slideshow by album or by selecting all of your photos. From the Home screen, tap Gallery Tap the album with the photos you want to view, then tap the Menu Key
.
> Slideshow > verify the slideshow settings > Start. Tap the Menu Key
> View all files > Menu Key verify the slideshow settings > Start.
> Slideshow >
Tap the Back Key to stop playing the slideshow. Videos Your tablet has a video player that lets you play all of your favorite videos. Playing a video 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Select the video you want to play.
> Apps tab > Videos
. Touch to pause video playback. Touch to resume video playback. Touch and hold to fast-forward in 3 second increments. Tap once to fast-forward 10 seconds. Touch and hold to rewind in 3 second increments. Tap once to rewind 10 seconds. Touch to manage the video volume. Touch to change the ratio of the video screen. 57 Touch access QSlide and display the video in small window. Touch to share your video via the SmartShare function. Tap to capture image during playing a video. Touch to lock/unlock a video screen. To change the volume while watching a video, press the Volume Keys on the right side of the tablet. Touch and hold a video in the list to access the following options:
Share,Delete, Trim and Details. TIP! While watching a video, slide up and down along the left side of the screen to adjust the screen brightness. Slide up and down along the right side of the screen to adjust the volume. Music Your tablet has a music player that lets you play all your favorite tracks. To access the music player, from the Home screen, tap Apps Music Playing a song 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Touch the Songs tab. 3 Select the song you want to play.
> Apps tab > Music
.
> Apps tab >
58 Touch to find the song on YouTube. Touch to see the current playlist. Touch to set the current song as a favorite. Touch to share your music via the SmartShare function. Touch to set shuffle mode. Touch to set repeat mode. Touch to manage the music volume. Touch to pause playback. Touch to resume playback. Touch to skip to the next track on the album or in the playlist. Touch and hold to fast-forward 3 seconds. Touch to go back to the beginning of the song. Touch twice to return to the previous song. Touch and hold to rewind 3 seconds. Touch to set the audio effect. To change the volume while listening to music, press the Volume Keys on the right side of the tablet. Touch and hold any song in the list to access the following options:
Play, Add to playlist, Share, Delete, Details and Search. 59 NOTE:
Some file formats are not supported, depending on the device software. If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. Music file copyrights may be protected by international treaties and national copyright laws. Therefore, it may be necessary to obtain permission or a licence to reproduce or copy music. In some countries, national laws prohibit private copying of copyrighted material. Before downloading or copying the file, check the national laws of the relevant country concerning the use of such material. 60 Tools QPair By connecting your tablet and mobile phone via QPair, you can sync incoming calls, messages, and social networking notifications between your tablet and mobile phone. 1 Run QPair and tap Get started > Start on your tablet first and then run the same steps on your phone. TIP! QPair may not be pre-installed on the phone. Go to Google Play Store and search for QPair and install it. NOTE: QPair works with phones running Android 4.1 or later. Some features may be limited depending on your phone model. 2 Bluetooth connection will be turned on automatically. 61 QPair features Call notifications Sends the tablet a notification when the phone receives a call. The notification displays the caller's number and allows you to decline the call. Message notifications Sends the tablet a notification when the phone receives a message. Social network notifications Displays a social networking notification on your tablet's Status Bar when it arrives on your phone. NOTE: To enable this feature, turn the QPair social network notifications option on your phone (Settings > Accessibility > QPair social network notifications). This option allows you to be notified of social networking notifications on your tablet. QuickMemo transfer Saves your current QuickMemo in the tablet's Gallery, and then syncs the tablet's Gallery with the Gallery on your phone. Recent app sticker When the paired device's screen is unlocked, a sticker will display the last app used on the other device if the app is installed both on the tablet and the phone. QSlide The QSlide function enables an overlay window on your tablets display for easy multi-tasking. QSlide windows can be opened from the QSlide apps bar on the Notifications panel, or directly from the applications that support the QSlide function. 62 1 Open the Notifications Panel and tap the desired app from the QSlide apps section. OR While using an application that supports QSlide, tap be displayed continuously as a small window on your screen. The function will 2 Slide to adjust the transparency level. Drag the QSlide title bar to move it to another position on the screen. OR Tap to run QSlide. Tap to exit the QSlide and return to full window. Tap to adjust transparency. Tap to end the QSlide. Tap to adjust the size. NOTE: The QSlide function can support up to two windows at the same time. QSlide only supports the following applications: Videos, Internet, Memo, Calendar, Calculator, Email, File Manager, and QVoice. 63 QuickMemo The QuickMemo feature allows you to create memos and capture screen shots. Capture screens, draw on them, and share them with family and friends with QuickMemo. Creating a QuickMemo 1 To access the QuickMemo feature, slide the Status Bar downwards and touch
. OR Press both of the Volume Keys at the same time for one second. 2 Select the desired menu option from the toolbar and create a memo. 3 Tap to save the memo. To exit QuickMemo at any time, tap the Back Key
. 64 NOTE:
Please use a fingertip while using the QuickMemo. Do not use your fingernail. Using the QuickMemo options The following options are available in the QuickMemo toolbar at the top of the screen. Touch to keep the current memo on the screen and use the tablet simultaneously. Allows you to choose the type of background you want to use. Allows you to undo and redo previous actions. Selects the pen type and color and the cropping tool. Erases edits you've made to the memo. Touch to send your memo to others or share it via social networking services. Saves the memo in the Notebook or Gallery. Viewing the saved QuickMemo From the Home screen, tap Apps select the QuickMemo album.
> Gallery or Notebook and 65 QuickRemote QuickRemote turns your tablet into a Universal Remote for your home TV or cable box. NOTE: QuickRemote may not be available for some devices and areas. To open the QuickRemote application and set up your QuickRemote(s) 1 From the Home screen, tap the Apps
> Apps tab > QuickRemote You can also perform the initial set up of your QuickRemote from the Notifications Panel. Swipe the Status Bar downward, tap the QuickRemote icon to select a room type and touch
, then tap ADD REMOTE. Touch to add the device. 2 Select the type and brand of device, then follow the on-screen instructions to configure the device(s). 66 NOTE: The QuickRemote operates the same way as an ordinary infrared
(IR) remote control in your region or country. Be careful not to cover the infrared sensor at the top of the tablet when you use the QuickRemote function. This function may not be supported depending on the model, the manufacturer or service company. Using QuickRemote 1 Open QuickRemote remote. and choose the room where you configured the 2 Select the remote you want by tapping its type/name on the QuickRemote bar along the left side of the screen. 3 Tap the buttons on the displayed remote. NOTE: When adding the TV remote control, QuickRemote can use the INPUT button to configure appropriate remote control. When configuring the INPUT button, the TV input source can be changed. To reset the TV input source, tap the INPUT button on QuickRemote several times
(depending on the number of devices connected to the TV). QuickRemote options To access the QuickRemote options menu, tap the Menu Key the desired option. to select NOTE: While playing music in the background, pressing any QuickRemote button will mute the sound for a second. 67 QuickTranslator Simply aim the camera of your smart tablet at the foreign sentence you want to understand. You can get the real-time translation anywhere and anytime. You can buy additional dictionaries for offline translation from the Google Play Store. Home language. Destination language. Switches to Voice mode. Tap the language button, then speak. Translation of a written word. Translation of a written sentence. Translation of a paragraph. Accesses the QuickTranslator settings. You can set the home and destination languages here. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap the translation format. Choose from 3 Tap the Settings icon and set the home and destination languages. 4 Hold the tablet toward the subject you want to translate for a few seconds.
> Apps tab > QuickTranslator
, Word, Line, or Block. NOTE: Only one dictionary is provided free of charge. Additional dictionaries must be purchased. Please select the dictionary you would like to install as your complimentary dictionary. 68 NOTE: There may be a difference in the rate of recognization depending on the size, font, color, brightness and angle of the letters that need to be translated. Voice Mate Voice Mate allows you hands-free interaction with your devices. You can ask Voice Mate to perform tablet functions using your voice, such as setting alarms, or searching the web. When you access Voice Mate for the first time, it displays help information to assist you in learning how to use this function. To open the Voice Mate application From the Home screen, tap the Apps Using the Voice Mate application 1 Open the Voice Mate application. 2 Tap the Speak icon to turn it on. Say what you want it to do for you.
> Voice Mate
. If you say Wake me up at 6 AM", Voice Mate will set the alarm for that time. NOTE: Use Voice Mate in a quiet environment so it can accurately recognize your commands. 69 Voice Mate Icons The following Voice Mate icons are displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Tap to display the Voice Mate QSlide window on the Home screen. Tap to say a voice command to execute. Tap to type a command to execute. Voice Mate Options menu Tap the Menu Key to access Settings and Help. NOTE:
When the language setting for Voice Mate is not the same as the default language setting on your tablet, some commands, such as launching apps, may not work. When entering text, you can only use letters or numbers. Voice Mate recognizes your speech better when you speak slowly. You can view examples of various commands by swiping the Voice Mate main screen to the left. Alarm Setting your alarm 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
.
> Apps tab > Alarm/Clock
>
2 Set the desired alarm time. 3 Set Repeat, Snooze duration, Vibration, Alarm sound, Alarm volume, Auto app starter, Puzzle lock and Memo. 4 Touch Save. 70 NOTE: To change alarm settings in the alarm list screen, touch the Menu Key and select Settings. Calculator Using your calculator 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Touch the number keys to enter numbers. 3 For simple calculations, touch the function you want to perform
> Apps tab > Calculator
.
(
,
, or
) followed by
. NOTE:
For more complex calculations, touch the Menu Key Scientific calculator, then choose the desired function.
, select the To view the calculation history, tap Menu Key
> Calculation history. Calendar Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap the drop-down menu at the top left corner to change the calendar
> Apps tab > Calendar
. view (Day, Week, Month, Year, Agenda). 3 Tap the date you wish to add an event to and tap
. 4 Touch the Event name field and enter the event name. 71 5 Touch the Location field and enter the location. Check the date and enter the time you wish your event to start and finish. 6 If you wish to add a note to your event, touch the Description field and enter the details. 7 If you wish to repeat the alarm, set REPEAT and set REMINDERS, if necessary. 8 Touch Save to save the event in the calendar. NOTE: Touch and hold a spot on the calendar to quickly save a calendar event on that date. Simply enter the event name and time, then tap Save. You can tap Details and enter more information, or update the event with additional details later. Tasks The Tasks app can be synchronized with your MS Exchange account. You can create and manage your tasks using your tablet or from MS Outlook or MS Office Outlook Web Access. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap the Add task icon
(in the upper-right corner of the screen). 3 Enter the Subject, Due date, Description, Repeat, and Reminder, as
> Tasks
. necessary. 4 Tap Save. 72 File Manager The File Manager application allows you to manage files in your internal/
external storage. To open the File Manager application From the Home screen, tap Apps
> File Manager
. Voice Recorder Use the voice recorder to record voice memos or other audio files. Recording a sound or voice 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Touch 3 Touch 4 Touch to begin recording. to end the recording. to listen to the recording.
> Apps tab > Voice Recorder
. to access your list of recordings. You can listen to the NOTE: Touch saved recordings. The available recording time may differ from actual recording time. Sending the voice recording 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip by touching
. 2 Choose from any of the available methods for sharing. 73 Task Manager You can manage your applications using Task Manager. You can easily check the number of applications that are currently running and shut down certain applications. Task Manager Options Touch Stop to stop individual apps. Tap Stop all to stop all currently running apps. Tap the Menu Key to access Help, Sort by, and Settings. POLARIS Office 5 POLARIS Office 5 is a professional mobile office solution that lets users conveniently view various types of office documents, including Word, Excel and PowerPoint files, anywhere or anytime, using their mobile devices. To create a new document 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > POLARIS Office 5
. 2 Register your email address on the Registration page. NOTE: You can tap Skip to ignore the registration information. to start a new document. 3 Tap 4 Tap a document type from the drop-down list, then choose a template. 5 Enter contents in the document using the tools at the top of the screen and the on-screen keyboard. 74 6 When you're done working on the document, tap
(in the top left corner of the screen), then tap Save (or Save as to enter a new document name) to save. 7 Enter the document name and touch Save. To view and edit a document on your device You can now easily view and edit a wide variety of file types, including Microsoft Office documents and Adobe PDF, right on their mobile devices. 1 Open POLARIS Office 5 and search for a document. 2 Touch the document that you want to view or edit. When viewing documents using POLARIS Office 5, the objects and layout remain the same as in the original documents. 3 To edit the document, tap
. Google+
Use the Google+ app to stay connected with people via Googles social network service. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Google+
. NOTE: This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. 75 Voice Search The Voice Search app allows you to search webpages using your voice instead of typing. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Say a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. Select
> Apps tab > Voice Search
. one of the suggested keywords that appear. NOTE: This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Downloads Use the Downloads app to see what files have been downloaded. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Downloads
. Box The Box app makes you easy to access and edit your files, share content and stay connected with your files from anywhere on any device. To open the Box application From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Box
. 76 The Web Internet Use this application to browse the Internet. Browser gives you a fast, full-color world of games, music, news, sports, entertainment and much more, right on your tablet wherever you are and whatever you enjoy. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Internet
. Tap to go back one page. Tap to go forward one page, to the page you connected to after the current one. This is the opposite of what happens when you touch the Back Key Tap to go to the Home page.
, which takes you to the previous page. Tap to add a new tab. Tap to access your bookmarks. Tap to run QSlide. Tap to close the current tab. Tap to refresh or stop the current page. Opening a page To open a new page, tap To go to another web page, tap a tab at the top of the screen to view the at the top of the browser. page. 77 Searching the web by voice Tap the web address field, tap the suggested keywords that appear.
, speak a keyword, and then select one of NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. on the browser toolbar and select on the browser toolbar and select the History tab to open a web Bookmarks To open a bookmarked web page, tap one. History Tap page from the list of recently-visited web pages. To clear the history, tap the Menu Key Using QSlide Use this feature to access the Internet without closing the current application. While viewing content on the browser, tap information on your tablet. To view the browser in full screen, tap
. You can then browse other
> Clear all history. Chrome Use Chrome to search for information and browse web pages. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Chrome
. NOTE: This application may not be available, depending on your region and service provider. 78 Viewing web pages Tap the address field (at the top of the screen), enter a web address or search criteria, and tap Opening a page To go to a new page, tap To go to another web page, tap the a tab at the top of the screen to select at the top of the browser. on the keyboard. the page. Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap suggested keywords that appear.
, speak a keyword and select one of the NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Syncing with other devices Sync open tabs and bookmarks to use with Chrome on another device when you are logged in with the same Google account. To view open tabs on other devices, tap the Menu Key
> Other devices. You must be signed in to the same Google account on all devices. Select a web page to open. Adding and viewing bookmarks To add bookmarks, tap To open a bookmarked web page, tap the Menu Key select the desired page.
> Bookmarks and in the URL bar. 79 to access the following options. Chrome Options menu Tap the Menu Key New tab Tap to open a new web page tab. New incognito tab Tap to open a new incognito tab. Bookmarks Displays your bookmarked web pages. Other devices Displays your open web pages on other devices. History Displays your browsing data (web pages you've visited). Share... Allows you to share the web page. Print... Tap to print the web page. Choose to automatically find a printer on your network, or manually enter one to use. Find in page Allows you to search for text on the current web page. Request desktop site Checkmark to access the desktop site when you view web pages on your tablet. Settings Allows you to change the settings specific to the Chrome app. Help Displays information about using the Chrome app on your tablet. 80 Settings Access the Settings menu 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps OR 2 Select a setting category and set the desired option. From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key
> Apps tab > Settings
.
> System settings. WIRELESS NETWORKS Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Turns on Wi-Fi to connect to available Wi-Fi networks. A list of all available Wi-Fi networks will be displayed. Tap one to connect to it. NOTE: Tap Search to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. in the Wi-Fi menu to access the following options. Tap the Menu Key WPS Push Button Allows you to connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. WPS Pin Entry Allows you to connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. Add network Allows you to manually enter a new Wi-Fi network. 81 Wi-Fi Direct Allows direct connection with Wi-Fi devices without any access point. Advanced Wi-Fi Accesses the advanced Wi-Fi settings. Interactive tutorial Displays some useful tutorials for the Wi-Fi function. TIP! How to obtain the MAC address To set up a connection in some wireless networks with MAC filters, you may need to enter the MAC address of your tablet in the router. You can find the MAC address in the following user interface: From the Home screen, tap Apps
>
Advanced Wi-Fi > MAC address.
> Wi-Fi > Menu Key
> Settings Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth wireless feature on or off to use Bluetooth. Turning Bluetooth on allows you to pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices. Tap the Menu Key in the Bluetooth menu to access the following options. Edit tablet name Changes your tablet name for easy identification when pairing and connecting. Enter your new tablet name, then tap Save. Visibility timeout Sets the amount of time other Bluetooth devices can see your tablet for pairing and connection. Choose from 2minutes, 5minutes, 1hour, and Never time out. Show received files Displays a list of your Bluetooth received files. Interactive tutorial Displays some useful tutorials about Bluetooth features. 82 Data usage Displays the data usage during the chosen periods of time. Tap an app from the list to view the app's data usage. More... Allows you to share folders with other devices via wireless connection. Airplane mode Allows you to set Airplane mode. Activating Airplane mode disables all wireless connections. Wireless storage You can manage files on your tablet in the computer or copy files to the tablet from the computer without a USB connection. Make sure that the tablet and computer are connected to the same network. Then, enter the web addresses shown on your tablet into the address bar of the browser on your computer. Miracast Allows you to wirelessly mirror your tablet screen and sound onto a Miracast dongle or TV. SmartShare Beam Allows you to receive multimedia content via SmartShare Beam from LG phones or tablets. Media server Allows to share media contents with nearby devices via DLNA. VPN Displays the list of Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) that you've previously configured. Allows you to add different types of VPNs. NOTE: You must set a lock screen PIN or password before you can use credential storage. 83 DEVICE Sound Sound profile Allows you to set the sound profile to Sound, Vibrate only or Silent. Volumes Manage the volume for Notifications, Touch feedback & system, and Music, video, games & other media. Notification sound Allows you to set your default notification ringtone. Touch sounds Allows you to set your tablet to play a sound when you touch buttons, icons and other onscreen items that react to your touch. Screen lock sound Allows you to set your tablet to play a sound when locking and unlocking the screen. Vibrate on touch Allows you to set the vibration feedback when the tablet screen is touched. Display Home screen Theme Sets the screen theme for your device. Wallpaper Sets the wallpaper to use on your Home screen. Screen swipe effect Sets the effect when you swipe to change screens. Allow Home screen looping Checkmark to set the Home screens to scroll continuously, eliminating the need to scroll back in the opposite direction when you reach one end. Home backup & restore Allows you to backup and restore app and widget configurations and themes. 84 Do you know? Enable this option to display the Do you know? help page as an additional Home screen canvas. Help Displays information about the Home screen. Lock screen Select screen lock Set a screen lock type to secure your tablet. Screen swipe effect Sets the screen swipe effect options. Weather animation Checkmark to show weather animation for the current location or primary city set in Weather based on auto data updates. Wallpaper Sets your Lock screen wallpaper. Select it from Gallery or Wallpaper gallery. Shortcuts Allows you to change the shortcuts on the Swipe Lock screen. Contact info for lost phone Checkmark to set contact info to be displayed on the Lock screen in case the phone is lost. Tap the text you want displayed as the contact info. Portrait view only Checkmark to always display the Lock screen in portrait view. Lock timer Sets the amount of time before the screen automatically locks after the screen has timed-out. Power button instantly locks Checkmark to instantly lock the screen when the Power/Lock Key is pressed. This setting overrides the Security lock timer setting. to enter Brightness Adjust the screen brightness. Touch Auto to set the brightness to automatically change. Screen timeout Set the time delay before the screen automatically turns off. 85 KnockON This feature allows you to turn the screen on and off. Quickly double-tap the center of the screen to turn it on. Double-tap the Status Bar, an empty area on the Home screen, or the Lock screen to turn the screen off. For the best results, do not move the tablet while using the KnockON feature. Screen-off effect Sets the screen-off effect used when the screen turns off. Auto-rotate screen Set to switch orientation automatically when you rotate the tablet. Daydream Tap the Daydream switch to toggle it On or Off. On allows the set screen saver to be displayed when the tablet is sleeping while docked and/or charging. Choose from Clock, Colors, Google Photos, Photo Frame, and Photo Table. NOTE: Charging might be slow while the screen saver is on. Font type Change the type of display font. Font size Change the size of the display font. Smart screen Keeps the screen on when the device detects your eyes looking at the screen. Smart video Checkmark to pause the video when it doesn't detect your eyes looking at the screen. Front touch buttons Set the Front Touch Keys displayed at the bottom of all of the screens. Set which ones are displayed, their position on the bar, and what they look like. You can also select the theme and the background. Motion sensor calibration Allows you to improve the accuracy of the tilt and speed of the sensor. 86 Storage INTERNAL STORAGE Displays the total amount of space in the devices memory and lists what type of data is using up space. SD CARD Displays the total amount of memory space on the microSD card. Mount/Unmount SD card Mounts and unmounts the microSD card from your tablet so that you can access the data stored in it, format the card, or safely remove it. This setting is dimmed if theres no microSD card installed, if youve already unmounted it, or if youve mounted the microSD card on your computer. Erase SD card Permanently erases everything on the microSD card and prepares it for use with your tablet. Battery BATTERY INFORMATION See how much battery power is used for device activities. The battery level displays in a percentage. The remaining time of use is also displayed. Battery percentage on status bar Displays the battery percentage on the Status Bar. Battery saver Manage the battery for the power saving items. Tap the to turn this feature on. Tap Battery saver for the following switch options. Turn Battery save on: Set the battery level at which you want Battery saver to turn on. Auto-sync: Turns off Auto-sync. Wi-Fi: Turns off Wi-Fi if data is not in use. 87 Bluetooth: Turns off Bluetooth if not connected. Vibrate on touch: Turns off touch feedback. Brightness: Adjusts the brightness. Screen timeout: Adjusts the screen timeout. Help Touch to access some tips for Power saver. Apps Display the list of applications such as currently running or downloaded. Swipe left and right to view one of the three tabs across the top of the screen to view detailed information for DOWNLOADED, RUNNING, and ALL applications. Tap an entry to view more information, tap Force stop (or Stop), then OK to stop it from running. Slide Aside Slide Aside allows you to quickly switch between three open applications (or tasks) using a three finger gesture. Refer to page 31 for more information. PERSONAL Accounts & sync Permits applications to synchronize data in the background, whether or not you are actively working in them. Deactivating Auto-sync data can save battery power and lower (but not eliminate) data usage. Cloud Tap Add account to add a cloud account. 88 to enter the text to be displayed as the Owner info. Users Checkmark to set the device owners name to be displayed on the Lock screen. Tap Add user Allows you to add new account for the tablet and use the Multi-
user feature. Location access Mode High accuracy Use GPS and Wi-Fi networks to estimate location. Battery saving Use Wi-Fi networks to estimate location. Device sensors only Use GPS to pinpoint your location. RECENT LOCATION REQUESTS - Displays apps that have recently requested your location information. LOCATION SERVICES Google Location Reporting Allows you to view your Google location settings. Security Encrypt tablet Allows you to encrypt data on the tablet for security. You will be required to enter a PIN or password to decrypt your tablet each time you power it on. Encrypt SD card storage Allows you to encrypt data on the MicroSD for security. Password typing visible Shows the last character of the hidden password as you type. 89 Tablet administrators View or deactivate tablet administrators. Unknown sources Allows installation of apps from non-Play Store applications. Verify apps Disallow or warn before installation of apps that may cause harm. Storage type Displays the storage type for certificates. Trusted credentials Displays trusted CA certificates. Install from storage Choose to install encrypted certificates. Clear credentials Remove all certificates. Language & input Use the Language & input settings to select the language for the text on your tablet and to configure the on-screen keyboard, including words you've added to its dictionary. Backup & reset Back up my data Set to backup your settings and application data to the Google server. Backup account Set the account to which you want to backup data to. Automatic restore Set to restore your settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled on your device. LG Backup service Backs up all information on the device and restores it in the event of data loss or replacement. Factory data reset Reset your settings to the factory default values and delete all your data. If you reset the tablet this way, you are prompted to re-enter the same information as when you first started Android. 90 SYSTEM Date & time Use Date & time settings to set how dates will be displayed. You can also use these settings to set your own time and time zone rather than obtaining the current time from the mobile network. Accessibility Use the Accessibility settings to configure accessibility plug-ins you have installed on your tablet. NOTE: Requires additional plug-ins to become selectable. TalkBack Allows you to set up the TalkBack function which assists people with impaired vision by providing verbal feedback. Tap the TalkBack switch at the top right corner of the screen to turn it on. Tap Settings at the bottom of the screen to adjust the TalkBack settings. On-Screen Phone Allows you to turn the On-Screen Phone feature on and off. Large text Checkmark to increase the size of the text. Invert colors Checkmark to invert the colors of the screen and content. Color adjustment Sets to view the screen with greater color contrast. Tap the switch to turn it on. Then tap the screen and drag across the screen in any direction until you see the color contrast you want to use. Touch zoom Allows you to zoom in and out by triple-tapping the screen. Screen shades Dims the screen's backlight. Mono audio Checkmark to combine both audio channels to play in each ear. To manually set the audio route, move the slider on the mono audio slide bar. 91 to turn this feature on. Set the language, to access the Power, Home, Volume down, to toggle between on and off. On
. Captions Allows to customize caption settings for those with hearing impairments. Tap the switch text size, and caption style options as desired. Touch feedback time Sets the touch and feedback time. Choose from Short, Medium, and Long. Universal touch Touch the switch allows you to replace the hardware keys with a Universal touch board Tap the Universal touch icon Volume up, and Pinch buttons. Draw a "W" on the board to automatically launch the browser application. Auto-rotate screen Checkmark to allow the device to rotate the screen depnding on the device orientation (portrait or landscape). Read passwords Checkmark to have verbal confirmation when inputting passwords. Accessibility settings shortcut Sets quick, easy access to selected features when you triple-tap Home Key. Text-to-speech output Sets the text-to-speech preferred engine and speech rate setting. Also plays a short demonstration of speech synthesis. The default language status is also displayed. PC connection Select USB connection method Opens a dialog box to choose the default connection mode when connecting your phone to a PC via USB. Choose from Charge tablet, Media sync (MTP), LG software or Send images (PTP). Ask upon connecting Checkmark to have the phone ask you to choose which USB connection mode it should connect with to a PC. 92 to change the icon location. Help Touch to get information on the different types of USB connections. PC Suite Allow Wi-Fi connection to transfer music and images between a computer and the phone. Help Displays help information for the PC Suite function. Accessory Quick Cover Activate the Quick Cover to turn the screen on or off automatically. USB storage Plug & Pop Sets the Plug & Pop feature for USB storage. Checkmark each desired option to automatically display that app on the app panel. Drag Earphone Plug & Pop Sets the Plug & Pop feature for earphones. Checkmark each desired option to automatically display that app on the app panel. Drag Dock Plug & Pop Sets the Plug & Pop features for Dock. Checkmark each desired option to automatically display that app on the app panel. Drag to change the icon location. Printing Allows you to print the content of certain screens (such as web pages displayed in Chrome) to a printer connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your Android device. About tablet This menu allows you to manage your software updates and view various information relating to your tablet. Tablet name Allows you to set your tablet name. Update Center Allows you to check for app and software updates. to change the icon location. 93 Battery Allows you to view battery status, battery level, and battery use information. Hardware information Allows you to view the model number, IP address, up time, CSN, Wi-Fi MAC address and Bluetooth address. Software information Allows you to view Android version, kernel version, build number, and software version. Legal information Allows you to view open source licenses and Google legal information. 94 LG Backup About backing up and restoring device data It is recommended that you regularly create and save a backup file on the internal storage, especially before updating any software. Maintaining a current backup file in storage memory may allow you to recover device data if your device is lost, stolen, or corrupted by an unforeseen issue. This LG Backup application is supported between LG smartphones and tablets, other software or operating system versions. As a result, when you buy the new LG smartphones and tablets, you can backup the current device data to your new device. If you have the LG Backup application preloaded on your smartphones and tablets, you can backup and restore most of your data, including downloaded and pre-installed applications, bookmarks, calendar entries, contacts, home screen settings, and system settings. You may also:
Perform a manual LG Backup of your device. Schedule automatic backups of your device. Restore your device data. Warning! To protect against an unexpected power off during backup or restore operations, due to insufficient battery power, you should always keep your battery fully charged. 95 LG Backup your tablet data 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps Backup.
> Apps tab > LG Backup
>
2 Select the check box for the items you want to backup and select Next. 3 On the Backup Location screen, touch Internal storage or SD card, then tap Next, followed by Start. 4 When all selected files have been backed up, you will see the message Backup completed. Scheduling automatic backups You can also program automatic backups for the data on your tablet according to your schedule setting. To do this, complete the following steps:
1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > LG Backup
>
Scheduled backup. 2 Tap Backup items and select the check box next to the item you want to backup. 3 Tap Backup location, and select Internal storage or SD card. 4 Set the backup time and scheduled backup files. 5 Tap the switch to activate automatic backups. Restoring tablet data NOTE: All files that are stored on your tablet are deleted before the backup file is restored. 96 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps restore & management.
> Apps tab > LG Backup
> File 2 On the Restore screen, select a backup file that contains the data you wish to restore. 3 Select the check box next to the item you wish to restore and select Next to restore it to your tablet. NOTE: Please note that your tablet data will be overwritten with the content of your backup. 4 If the backup file is encrypted, type the password that you created to encrypt it. 5 When all selected files have been restored, the tablet will automatically be restart. NOTE: You can set the lock option when creating a backup to encrypt your backup files for extra protection. On the LG Backup main screen, touch the Menu Key
> Set password and enter a password and hint in case you forgot your password. Once you have set up a password, you need to enter it every time you want to do backup/restore. 97 Tablet software update Tablet software update This feature allows you to update the firmware of your tablet to the latest version conveniently from the internet without the need to visit a service center. For more information on how to use this function, please visit:
http://www.lg.com As the tablet firmware update requires the users full attention for the duration of the update process, please make sure to check all instructions and notes that appear at each step before proceeding. Please note that removing the USB cable or battery during the upgrade may seriously damage your tablet. LG tablet software update via Over-the-Air (OTA) This feature allows you to update the firmware of your tablet to the newer version conveniently via OTA without connecting the USB data cable. This feature is only available if and when LG makes the newer version of the firmware available for your device. First, you can check the software version on your tablet:
From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key tablet > Software information. To perform the tablet software update, from the Home screen, tap the Menu Key Update > Check now for update.
> System settings > About tablet > Update Center > Software
> System settings > About 98 NOTE: LG reserves the right to make firmware updates available only for selected models at its own discretion and does not guarantee the availability of the newer version of the firmware for all tablet models. NOTE: Your personal dataincluding information about your Google account and any other accounts, your system/application data and settings, any downloaded applications and your DRM licence might be lost in the process of updating your device's software. Therefore, LGrecommends that you back up your personal data before updating your tablet's software. LG does not take responsibility for any loss of personal data. 99 Accessories These accessories are available for use with the your tablet. (Items described below may be optional.) Travel adaptor USB cable Quick Start Guide NOTE:
Always use genuine LG accessories. Failure to do this may void your warranty. Accessories may vary in different regions. 100 Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your tablet. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures No applications can be set Not supported by service provider or registration required. Contact your service provider. Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Outside temperature is too hot or cold. Make sure tablet is charging at a normal temperature. Charging error Contact problem No voltage Check the charger and its connection to the tablet. Plug the charger into a different socket. Charger defective Replace the charger. Wrong charger Use only original LG accessories. Impossible to receive /
send photos Memory full Delete some images from your tablet. 101 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Files do not open Unsupported file format Check the supported file formats. No sound Vibration mode Check the settings status in the sound menu to make sure you are not in vibration or silent mode. 102 For Your Safety Safety Information Please read and observe the following information for safe and proper use of your tablet and to prevent damage. WARNING! This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Caution: Violation of the instructions may cause minor or serious damage to the product. WARNING Notice for Battery replacement For your safety, do not remove the battery incorporated in the product. If you need to replace the battery, take it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealer for assistance. Li-Ion Battery is a hazardous component which can cause injury. Battery replacement by non-qualified professional can cause damage to your device. Do not disassemble or open crush, bend or deform, puncture or shred. Repairs under warranty, at LGs option, may include replacement parts or boards that are either new or reconditioned, provided that they have functionality equal to that of the parts being replaced. 103 Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, expose to fire, explosion or other hazard. Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified. Only use the battery with a charging system that has been qualified with the system per this standard. Use of an unqualified battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects to contact battery terminals. Replace the battery only with another battery that has been qualified with the system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x. Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage or other hazard. Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations. Avoid dropping the tablet. If the tablet is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects damage, take it to a service center for inspection. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other hazard. For those host devices that utilize a USB port as a charging source, the host devices user manual shall include a statement that the device shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program. Charger and Adapter Safety The charger and adapter are intended for indoor use only. Insert the battery pack charger vertically into the wall power socket. Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. 104 Use the correct adapter for your tablet when using the battery pack charger abroad. Battery Information and Care Please read the manual of proper installation and removal of the battery. Please read the manual of specified charger about charging method. Do not damage the power cord by bending, twisting, or heating. Do not use the plug if it is loose as it may cause electric shock or fire. Do not place any heavy items on the power cord. Do not allow the power cord to be crimped as it may cause electric shock or fire. Unplug the power cord prior to cleaning your tablet, and clean the power plug pin when its dirty. When using the power plug, ensure that its firmly connected. If not, it may cause excessive heat or fire. If you put your tablet in a pocket or bag without covering the receptacle of the tablet (power plug pin), metallic articles (such as a coin, paperclip or pen) may short-
circuit the tablet. Short-circuit of the terminal may damage the battery and cause an explosion. Always cover the receptacle when not in use. Recharge the battery after long periods of non-use to maximize battery life. Battery life will vary due to usage pattern and environmental conditions. Never store your tablet in temperature less than -4F or greater than 122F. Charging temperature range is between 32F and 113F. Do not charge the battery out of recommended temperature range. Charging out of recommended range might cause the generating heat or serious damage of battery. And also, it might cause the deterioration of batterys characteristics and cycle life. 105 Do not use or leave the device under the blazing sun or in heated car by sunshine. The device may generate heat, smoke or flame. And also, it might cause the deterioration of batterys characteristics or cycle life. The battery back in the device has protection circuit to avoid the danger. Do not use near places that can generate static electricity more than 100V which could damage the protection circuit. Damaged protection circuits may generate smoke, rupture or ignite. When using the device for the first time, if it emits a bad smell, you see rust on it, or anything else abnormal, do not use the equipment and bring the battery to the shop which it was bought. Keep device away from babies and small children. If children use the battery, their parents or legal guardians are responsible for supervising and teaching them about the safe handling of device and how to use batteries according to the manual with care. If liquid from the battery in the device rubs against skin or clothing, wash with fresh water. It may cause the skin inflammation. Do not user the battery and take it to the nearest authorized LG Electronics service point or dealer for assistance. Be careful that children do not swallow any parts
(such as earphone, connection parts of the device, etc.). This could cause asphyxiation or suffocation resulting in serious injury or death. Do not handle the tablet with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause an electric shock or seriously damage your tablet. Do not use harsh chemicals (such as alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) or detergents to clean your tablet. This could cause a fire. Always unplug the charger from the wall socket after the tablet is fully charged to save unnecessary power consumption of the charger. 106 Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years:
Keep your Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device. Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0C / 32F or above 45C / 113F. Use your tablet in temperatures between 0C /32F and 40C/104F, if possible. Exposing your tablet to extremely low or high temperatures may result in damage, malfunction, or even explosion. Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing so may cause a fire or explosion. Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand. 107 Sunscreen lotion Do not expose or wear your device to any liquid like sunscreen lotion. Doing so may cause your device to or damage to the mobile device. Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloths lightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. Shock or vibration Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Paint Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the devices moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation. General Notice Do not place items containing magnetic components such as a credit card, phone card, bank book, or subway ticket near your device. The magnetism of the device may damage the data stored in the magnetic strip. When the tablet is not used for a long period time, store it in a safe place with the power cord unplugged. Do not use the device if the antenna is damaged. If a damaged antenna contacts skin, it may cause a slight burn. Please contact an LG Authorized Service Center to replace the damaged antenna. 108 The data saved in your tablet might be deleted due to careless use, repair of the tablet, or upgrade of the software. Please backup your important contacts. (pictures, and videos could also be deleted.) The manufacturer is not liable for damage due to the loss of data. When you use the tablet in public places, set the volume to vibration so you dont disturb others. Do not turn your tablet on or off when putting it to your ear. Your device is an electronic device that generates heat during normal operation. Extremely prolonged, direct skin contact in the absence of adequate ventilation may result in discomfort or minor burns. Therefore, use care when handling your device during or immediately after operation. Use accessories, such as earphones and headsets, with caution. Ensure that cables are tucked away safely and do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. Part 15.19 statement This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that causes undesired operation. Part 15.21 statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 109 Part 15.105 statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC RF Exposure Information WARNING! Read this information before operating the device. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States, with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326, adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. The design of this device complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards. 110 Bodily Contact During Operation This device was tested for typical use with the back of the device kept 0 inch
(0 cm) from the body. Caution Use only the supplied antenna. Use of unauthorized antennas (or modifications to the antenna) could impair call quality, damage the device, void your warranty and/or violate FCC regulations. Dont use the device with a damaged antenna. A damaged antenna could cause a minor skin burn. Contact your local dealer for a replacement antenna. Consumer Information About Radio Frequency Emissions Your wireless device, which contains a radio transmitter and receiver, emits radio frequency energy during use. The following consumer information addresses commonly asked questions about the health effects of wireless devices. Are wireless devices safe?
Scientific research on the subject of wireless devices and radio frequency
(RF) energy has been conducted worldwide for many years, and continues. In the United States, the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) set policies and procedures for wireless devices. The FDA issued a website publication on health issues related to device usage where it states, The scientific community at large believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to radiofrequency (RF) from the devices and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community does recommend conducting 111 additional research to address gaps in knowledge. That research is being conducted around the world and FDA continues to monitor developments in this field. You can access the joint FDA/FCC website at http://www.fda. gov (under C in the subject index, select Cell Phones > Research). You can also contact the FDA toll-free at (888) 463-6332 or (888) INFO-FDA. In June 2000, the FDA entered into a cooperative research and development agreement through which additional scientific research is being conducted. The FCC issued its own website publication stating that there is no scientific evidence that proves that wireless device usage can lead to cancer or a variety of other problems, including headaches, dizziness or memory loss. This publication is available at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety or through the FCC at (888) 225-5322 or (888) CALL-FCC. What does SAR mean?
In 1996, the FCC, working with the FDA, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, and other agencies, established RF exposure safety guidelines for wireless devices in the United States. Before a wireless device model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested by the manufacturer and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed limits established by the FCC. One of these limits is expressed as a Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy in the body. Tests for SAR are conducted with the device transmitting at its highest power level in all tested frequency bands. Since 1996, the FCC has required that the SAR of handheld wireless device not exceed 1.6 watts per kilogram, averaged over one gram of tissue. Although the SAR is determined at the highest power level, the actual SAR value of a wireless device while operating can be less than the reported SAR value. This is because the SAR value may vary from call to call, depending on factors such as proximity to a cell site, the proximity of the device to the 112 body while in use, and the use of hands-free devices. Before a device model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF emission guidelines. SAR information on this model device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc. gov/oet/ea/fccid/ after searching on FCC ID ZNFV700. For more information about SARs, see the FCCs OET Bulletins 56 and 65 at http://www.fcc.gov/Bureaus/Engineering_Technology/Documents/bulletins or visit the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association website at http://www.ctia.org/consumer_info/index.cfm/AID/10371. You may also wish to contact the manufacturer of your device. Can I minimize my RF exposure?
If you are concerned about RF, there are several simple steps you can take to minimize your RF exposure. You can, of course, reduce your talk time. You can place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, as the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. The FDA/
FCC website states that hands-free kits can be used with wireless devices for convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the device, which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand, if the device is mounted against the waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless devices marketed in the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless of whether they are used against the head or against the body. Either 113 configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit. Also, if you use your wireless device while in a car, you can use a device with an antenna on the outside of the vehicle. You should also read and follow your wireless device manufacturers instructions for the safe operation of your device. Do wireless devices pose any special risks to children?
The FDA/FCC website states that the scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless communication devices, including children. The FDA/FCC website further states that some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless device at all. For example, the Stewart Report from the United Kingdom [UK] made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a device causes brain tumors or other ill effects. [The UKs]
recommendation to limit device use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. A copy of the UKs leaflet is available at http://www.dh.gov.uk (search mobile), or you can write to: NRPB, Chilton, Didcot, Oxon OX11 ORQ, United Kingdom. Copies of the UKs annual reports on mobile device and RF are available online at www.iegmp.org.uk and http://www.hpa.org.uk/radiation/ (search mobile). Parents who wish to reduce their childrens RF exposure may choose to restrict their childrens wireless device use. Where can I get further information about RF emissions?
For further information, see the following additional resources
(websitescurrent as of April 2005):
U.S. Food and Drug Administration FDA Consumer magazine November-December 2000 114 Telephone: (888) INFO-FDA http://www.fda.gov
(Under C in the subject index, select Cell Phones > Research.) U.S. Federal Communications Commission 445 12th Street, S.W. Washington, D.C. 20554 Telephone: (888) 225-5322 http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety Independent Expert Group on Mobile Devices http://www.iegmp.org.uk Royal Society of Canada Expert Panels on Potential Health Risks of Radio Frequency Fields from Wireless Telecommunication Devices 283 Sparks Street Ottawa, Ontario K1R 7X9 Canada Telephone: (613) 991-6990 World Health Organization Avenue Appia 20 1211 Geneva 27 Switzerland Telephone: 011 41 22 791 21 11 http://www.who.int/mediacentre/factsheets/fs193/en/
115 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection c/o Bundesamt fur Strahlenschutz Ingolstaedter Landstr. 1 85764 Oberschleissheim Germany Telephone: 011 49 1888 333 2156 http://www.icnirp.de Wi-Fi Caution This device is capable of operating in 802.11a/n mode. For 802.11a/n devices operating in the frequency range of 5.15 - 5.25 GHz, they are restricted for indoor operations to reduce any potential harmful interference for Mobile Satellite Services (MSS) in the US. Wi-Fi Access Points that are capable of allowing your device to operate in 802.11a/n mode (5.15 - 5.25 GHz band) are optimized for indoor use only. If your Wi-Fi network is capable of operating in this mode, please restrict your Wi-Fi use indoors to not violate federal regulations to protect Mobile Satellite Services. Engineering in Medicine and Biology Society, Committee on Man and Radiation (COMAR) of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers http://ewh.ieee.org/soc/embs/comar/
116 Consumer Information on SAR
(Specific Absorption Rate) This model device meets the government's requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your wireless device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions specified by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. Because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels to use only the power required to reach the network, in general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a device model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. 117 The highest SAR value for this device when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 1.00W/kg. (body-worn measurements differ among device models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between SAR levels of various devices and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF emission guidelines. SAR information on this model device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID ZNFV700. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) website at http://www.ctia.org/.
* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile device used by the public is 1.6watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. Caution:
Avoid potential hearing loss. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and cellular telephones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use of headphones
(including headsets, earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing. Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and other potential 118 hearing problems varies. The amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound, the device, the device settings and the headphones. You should follow some commonsense recommendations when using any portable audio device:
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately. When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to. Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use noise-
cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise. Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal. Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor. You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources:
Safety 205 American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 20190 Voice: (800) 222-2336 119 Email: info@audiology.org Internet: www.audiology.org National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive, MSC 2320 Bethesda, MD USA 20892-2320 Voice: (301) 496-7243 Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/health/hearing National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Hubert H. Humphrey Bldg. 200 Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20201 Voice:
1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674) Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html TIA Safety Information The following is the complete TIA Safety Information for wireless handheld devices. Exposure to Radio Frequency Signal Your wireless handheld portable device is a low power radio transmitter and receiver. When ON, it receives and sends out Radio Frequency (RF) signals. In August, 1996, the Federal Communications Commissions (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for handheld wireless devices. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies:
120 NCRP Report 86 (1986) ICNIRP (1996) ANSI C95.1 (1992) *
* American National Standards Institute; National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements; International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. For example, over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1). The design of your device complies with the FCC guidelines (and those standards). Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate FCC regulations. Tips on Efficient Operation For your device to operate most efficiently:
Dont touch the antenna unnecessarily when the tablet is in use. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the tablet to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless device. 121 Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of six (6) inches be maintained between a handheld wireless device and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:
Should ALWAYS keep the device more than six (6) inches from their pacemaker when the device is turned ON;
Should not carry the device in a breast pocket;
Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference;
Should turn the tablet OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless device may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider (or call the customer service line to discuss alternatives). Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Health Care Facilities Turn your device OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may use equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. 122 Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted Facilities Turn your device OFF in any facility where posted notices so require. Aircraft FCC regulations prohibit using your device while in the air. Switch OFF your tablet before boarding an aircraft. Blasting Areas To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your device OFF when in a blasting area or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Potentially Explosive Atmosphere Turn your device OFF when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always marked clearly. Potential areas may include: fueling areas (such as gasoline stations); below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities;
vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain, dust, or metal powders); and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. 123 For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag inflates with great force. DO NOT place objects, including either installed or portable wireless equipment, in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. FDA Consumer Update The U.S. Food and Drug Administrations Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Tablets:
1. Do tablets pose a health hazard?
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using tablets. There is no proof, however, that tablets are absolutely safe. Tablets emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF when in idle mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results. 2. What is the FDAs role concerning the safety of tablets?
Under the law, the FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as tablets before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if tablets are shown to emit Radio Frequency (RF) energy at a level 124 that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, the FDA could require the manufacturers of tablets to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace, or recall the tablets so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data does not justify FDA regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the tablet industry to take a number of steps, including the following:
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by tablets;
Design tablets in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and Cooperate in providing users of tablets with the best possible information on possible effects of tablet use on human health. The FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Occupational Safety and Health Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working group activities, as well. The FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for tablets with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All tablets that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. The FCC relies on the FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about tablets. 125 The FCC also regulates the base stations that the tablet networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the tablets themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from tablets. Base stations are thus not the subject of the safety questions discussed in this document. 3. What kinds of devices are the subject of this update?
The term wireless device refers here to handheld wireless devices with built-in antennas, often called cell, mobile, or PCS devices. These types of wireless devices can expose the user to measurable Radio Frequency (RF) energy because of the short distance between the device and the users head. These RF exposures are limited by FCC safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of the FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the device is located at greater distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a persons RF exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. 4. What are the results of the research done already?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of Radio Frequency (RF) energy exposures characteristic of wireless devices have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. 126 Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless devices, so we do not know with certainty what the results of such studies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the use of wireless devices and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects from wireless device RF exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of device use in these studies was around three years. 5. What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from tablets poses a health risk?
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using tablets would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years. However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but ten or more years follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop if they do may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of tablets. Many factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the tablet is held, or which model of tablet is used. 127 6. What is the FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of tablet RF?
The FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) energy. The FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization International Electro Magnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues. The FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association
(CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research And Development Agreement
(CRADA) to do research on wireless device safety. The FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts with independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless device users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. 7. How can I find out how much Radio Frequency energy exposure I can get by using my tablet?
All tablets sold in the United States must comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) guidelines that limit Radio Frequency
(RF) energy exposures. The FCC established these guidelines in consultation with the FDA and the other federal health and safety agencies. The FCC limit for RF exposure from wireless devices is set at a Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR) of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC limit is consistent with 128 the safety standards developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering (IEEE) and the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement. The exposure limit takes into consideration the bodys ability to remove heat from the tissues that absorb energy from the tablet and is set well below levels known to have effects. Manufacturers of tablets must report the RF exposure level for each model of tablet to the FCC. The FCC website (http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety) gives directions for locating the FCC identification number on your tablet so you can find your tablets RF exposure level in the online listing. 8. What has the FDA done to measure the Radio Frequency energy coming from tablets?
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) is developing a technical standard for measuring the Radio Frequency (RF) energy exposure from tablets and other wireless handsets with the participation and leadership of FDA scientists and engineers. The standard, Recommended Practice for Determining the Spatial-Peak Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) in the Human Body Due to Wireless Communications Devices: Experimental Techniques, sets forth the first consistent test methodology for measuring the rate at which RF is deposited in the heads and bodies of tablet users. The test method uses a tissue-simulating model of the human head and body. Standardized SAR test methodology is expected to greatly improve the consistency of measurements made at different laboratories on the same tablet. SAR is the measurement of the amount of energy absorbed in tissue, either by the whole body or a small part of the body. It is measured in watts/kg (or milliwatts/g) of matter. This measurement is used to determine whether a tablet complies with safety guidelines. 129 9. What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to Radio Frequency energy from my tablet?
If there is a risk from these products and at this point we do not know that there is it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a tablet will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct extended conversations using a wireless device every day, you could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the tablet away from your body or use a wireless device connected to a remote antenna. Again, the scientific data does not demonstrate that tablets are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from tablet use. 10. What about children using tablets?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of tablets, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) energy, the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using tablets. Reducing the time of tablet use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless devices at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless device causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless device use by children was strictly 130 precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. 11. What about wireless communications device interference with medical equipment?
Radio Frequency (RF) energy from wireless communications devices can interact with some electronic devices. For this reason, the FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure Electro Magnetic Interference
(EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless devices. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by the FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless communications device EMI. The FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless devices and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless communications devices so that no interference occurs when a person uses a compatible device and a compatible hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000. The FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless communications devices for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, the FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem. 131 The FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless devices for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, the FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem. 12. Where can I find additional information?
For additional information, please refer to the following resources:
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program
(http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety) International Commission on Non-lonizing Radiation Protection
(http://www.icnirp.de) World Health Organization (WHO) International EMF Project
(http://www.who.int/emf) National Radiological Protection Board (UK)
(http://www.hpa.org.uk/radiation/) Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of wireless devices in the areas where you drive and always obey them. Also, if using your device while driving, please observe the following:
Give full attention to driving -- driving safely is your first responsibility;
Use hands-free operation, if available;
Pull off the road and park before using it. 132 How to update your tablet Access to latest firmware releases, new software functions and improvements. Update your tablet without a PC: Select Update Center
> Software Update > Check now for update. Update your tablet by connecting it to your PC. For more information about using this function, please visit http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp and select the country and language. Notice: Open Source Software To obtain the corresponding source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licences, please visit http://opensource.lge.com/
All referred licence terms, disclaimers and notices are available for download with the source code. 133 Limited Warranty Statement 1. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS:
LG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accesso-
ries will be free from defects in material and workmanship, according to the following terms and conditions:
(1) The limited warranty for the product extends for TWELVE (12) MONTHS beginning on the date of purchase of the product with valid proof of purchase, or absent valid proof of purchase, FIFTEEN (15) MONTHS from date of manufacture as determined by the units manufacture date code.
(2) The limited warranty extends only to the original purchaser of the product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end user.
(3) This warranty is good only to the original purchaser of the product during the warranty period as long as it is in the U.S., including Alaska, Hawaii, U.S. Territories and Canada.
(4) The external housing and cosmetic parts shall be free of defects at the time of shipment and, therefore, shall not be covered under these limited warranty terms.
(5) Upon request from LG, the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of purchase.
(6) The customer shall bear the cost of shipping the product to the Customer Service Department of LG. LG shall bear the cost of shipping the product back to the consumer after the completion of service under this limited warranty. 2. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
(1) Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner.
(2) Defects or damages from abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, expo-
sure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the fault of LG, including damage caused by shipping, blown fuses, spills of food or liquid.
(3) Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship.
(4) That the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by consumer of the al-
leged defect or malfunction of the product during the applicable limited warranty period.
(5) Products which have had the serial number removed or made illegible.
(6) This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied either in fact or by operations of law, statutory or otherwise, including, but not limited to any implied war-
ranty of marketability or fitness for a particular use.
(7) Damage resulting from use of non LG approved accessories.
(8) All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normal customer use.
(9) Products operated outside published maximum ratings.
(10) Products used or obtained in a rental program.
(11) Consumables (such as fuses). 3. WHAT LG WILL DO:
LG will, at its sole option, either repair, replace or refund the purchase price of any unit that is covered under this limited warranty. LG may choose at its option to use functionally equivalent re-conditioned, refurbished or new units or parts or any units. In addition, LG will not re-install or back-up any data, applications or software that you have added to your phone. It is therefore recommended that you back-up any such data or information prior to sending the unit to LG to avoid the permanent loss of such information. 4. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
No other express warranty is applicable to this product. THE DURATION OF ANY IM-
PLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN. LG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY OTHER DAM-
AGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusive limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts; so these limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. 5. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
To obtain warranty service, please call or fax to the following telephone numbers from any-
where in the continental United States:
Tel. 1-800-793-8896 Or visit http://us.lgservice.com. Correspondence may also be mailed to:
LG Electronics Service- Mobile Handsets, P.O. Box 240007, Huntsville, AL 35824 DO NOT RETURN YOUR PRODUCT TO THE ABOVE ADDRESS. Please call or write for the location of the LG authorized service center nearest you and for the procedures for obtain-
ing warranty claims. Printed in China
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.56 MiB |
E N G L I S H FRANAIS User Guide Guide de lutilisateur LG-V700 MFL00000000 (1.0) www.lg.com/ca ENGLISH User Guide Screen displays and illustrations may differ from those you see on actual device. Some of the contents of this guide may not apply to your device, depending on the software and your service provider. All information in this document is subject to change without notice. This device is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due to the touch screen keyboard. Copyright 2014 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Google, Google Maps, Gmail, YouTube, Hangouts and Play Store are trademarks of Google, Inc. Table of contents About this user guide .........................5 About this user guide ........................... 5 Trademarks ............................................. 5 DivX HD .................................................. 6 Dolby Digital Plus .................................. 6 For Your Safety .................................... 7 Safety Guidelines .............................. 13 Important notice ...............................23 Getting to know your device ............27 Tablet Overview ....................................27 Charging your tablet ...........................29 Optimizing Battery Life ......................30 To extend the life of your battery .......30 To view the battery charge level ...........31 To monitor and control what uses the battery .....................................................31 Inserting a microSD card .....................31 Removing the microSD card ..............32 Formatting the microSD card ............33 Locking and unlocking the screen.....33 Your Home screen ............................ 34 Touch Screen tips ................................34 Tap or touch ............................................... 34 Touch and hold ......................................... 34 Drag ............................................................... 34 Swipe or slide ............................................. 35 Double-tap .................................................. 35 Pinch-to-Zoom ......................................... 35 2 Rotate the screen ..................................... 35 KnockON ..................................................... 36 Home screen ........................................36 Customizing the Home screen .......... 38 Returning to recently-used applications ..........................................38 Notifications .........................................39 Swipe down for notifications &
settings ......................................................... 39 Quick Settings on Notification Panel .............................................................40 To rearrange Quick Setting items on the Notification Panel .......................40 QSlide apps on the Notifications panel .............................................................40 Using the QSlide apps .............................41 Indicator icons on the Status Bar ........41 Multiple Users ......................................42 Slide aside ............................................44 Plug & Pop ...........................................44 Capturing a Screenshot ......................45 Using QuickMemo to capture a screenshot .................................................. 45 Using Capture plus to capture a screenshot .................................................. 45 Entering Text.........................................46 Entering accented letters ...................... 46 Google account setup .......................47 Connecting to Networks and Devices .............................................. 48 Wi-Fi .....................................................48 Connecting to Wi-Fi networks ............48 Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a Wi-Fi network ....................................48 Bluetooth ..............................................49 Turning on Bluetooth and pairing up your tablet with a Bluetooth device ... 49 Send data using the Bluetooth wireless feature ..........................................50 Receive data using the Bluetooth wireless feature ..........................................50 SmartShare ...........................................51 Enjoying the content via a variety of devices ...........................................................51 Playing/Sending .........................................51 Enjoying the content from Nearby devices ...................................................51 Connecting devices ..................................51 Searching other devices........................ 52 Using the content from the Cloud ....52 Using the Cloud ....................................... 52 PC connections with a USB cable .....52 Transferring music, photos and videos using the USB mass storage mode ............................................................ 52 Synchronize with Windows Media Player ............................................................ 53 Contacts .............................................54 Searching for a contact ......................54 Adding a new contact .........................54 Favorite Contacts .................................54 Creating a group ..................................55 Managing an E-mail account .............56 Working with account folders ............57 Composing and sending E-mail ........57 Receiving emails ..................................57 Camera ...............................................58 Getting to know the viewfinder ..........58 Using the advanced settings ..............59 Taking a quick photo ..........................60 Once you've taken a photo ..................61 Viewing your saved photos .................62 Video camera .....................................63 Getting to know the viewfinder ..........63 Using the advanced settings ..............64 Recording a quick video .....................65 After recording a video .......................65 Watching your saved videos ...............66 Adjusting the volume when viewing a video .....................................66 Multimedia .........................................67 Gallery ...................................................67 Viewing pictures ........................................67 Zooming in and out ................................68 Playing videos ............................................68 Deleting images and videos ................68 Setting as wallpaper ................................68 Slideshow ..............................................69 Videos ...................................................69 Playing a video .......................................... 69 Music .....................................................70 Playing a song ............................................70 E-mail .................................................56 Tools ....................................................73 3 Access the Settings menu .................92 WIRELESS NETWORKS ....................92 DEVICE .................................................95 PERSONAL ..........................................99 SYSTEM ...............................................101 LG Backup ........................................105 About backing up and restoring device data .........................................105 LG Backup your tablet data ..............106 Scheduling automatic backups .......106 Restoring tablet data ........................106 Tablet software update ...................108 Tablet software update .....................108 LG Tablet Software update via Over-the-Air (OTA) ............................108 Accessories .......................................110 Troubleshooting .................................111 QPair .....................................................73 QSlide ................................................... 74 QuickMemo .......................................... 76 QuickRemote .......................................78 QuickTranslator ....................................80 Voice Mate .............................................81 Alarm .....................................................82 Calculator .............................................83 Calendar ...............................................83 Tasks ......................................................84 Voice Recorder .....................................84 Task Manager .......................................85 POLARIS Office 5 ..............................85 Google+.................................................86 Voice Search .........................................87 Downloads ............................................87 BOX .......................................................87 The Web ............................................ 88 Internet..................................................88 Opening a page .......................................88 Searching the web by voice................. 89 Bookmarks .................................................. 89 History ........................................................... 89 Using QSlide .............................................. 89 Chrome .................................................89 Viewing webpages ...................................90 Opening a page .......................................90 Searching the web by voice.................90 Syncing with other devices ...................90 Adding and Viewing bookmarks .......90 Chrome Options menu ...........................91 Settings ..............................................92 4 About this user guide About this user guide Before using your device, please carefully read this manual. This will ensure that you use your device safely and correctly. Some of the images and screenshots provided in this guide may appear differently on your tablet. Your content may differ from the final product, or from software supplied by service providers or carriers, This content may be subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of this manual, please visit the LG website at www.lg.com. Your device's applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. LG cannot be held liable for any performance issues resulting from the use of applications developed by providers other than LG. LG cannot be held liable for performance or incompatibility issues resulting from edited registry settings being edited or operating system software being modified. Any attempt to customize your operating system may cause the device or its applications to not work as they should. Software, audio, wallpaper, images, and other media supplied with your device are licensed for limited use. If you extract and use these materials for commercial or other purposes is, you may be infringing copyright laws. As a user, you are fully are entirely responsible for the illegal use of media. Additional charges may be applied for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services. To avoid additional charges, select a data plan to is suitable for your needs. Contact your service provider to obtain additional details. Trademarks LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Electronics. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. 5 DivX HD ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium content. DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. Notice: Open Source Software To obtain the corresponding source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licences, please visit http://opensource.lge.com/
All referred licence terms, disclaimers and notices are available for download with the source code. Dolby Digital Plus Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 6 For Your Safety Important Information This user guide contains important information on the use and operation of this device. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage or misuse of the device. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user guide could void your warranty for this equipment. Before You Start Safety Instructions WARNING Notice for Battery replacement For your safety, do not remove the battery incorporated in the product. If you need to replace the battery, take it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealer for assistance. Li-Ion Battery is a hazardous component which can cause injury. Battery replacement by non-qualified professional can cause damage to your device. WARNING To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your device to high humidity areas, such as the bathroom, swimming pool, etc. 7 Always store your device away from heat. Never store your device in settings that may expose it to temperatures less than 32F (0C) or greater than 104F (40C), such as outside during extreme weather conditions or in your car on a hot day. Exposure to excessive cold or heat will result in malfunction, damage and/or catastrophic failure. Be careful when using your device near other electronic devices. RF emissions from your device may affect nearby inadequately shielded electronic equipment. You should consult with manufacturers of any personal medical devices such as pacemakers and hearing aides to determine if they are susceptible to interference from your device. Turn off your device in a medical facility or at a gas station. Never place your device in a microwave oven as this will cause the battery to explode. Safety Information Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this user guide. Never use an unapproved battery since this could damage the device and/
or battery and could cause the battery to explode. Never place your device in a microwave oven as it will cause the battery to explode. Your device contains an internal battery. Do not dispose of your battery by fire or with hazardous or flammable materials. Make sure that no sharp-edged items come into contact with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire. Store the battery in a place out of reach of children. Be careful that children do not swallow any parts such as rubber plugs
(earphone, connection parts of the device, etc.). This could cause asphyxiation or suffocation. 8 Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. When riding in a car, do not leave your device or set up the hands-free kit near to the air bag. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag is activated, you may be seriously injured. Do not use a hand-held device while driving. Do not use the device in areas where its use is prohibited. (For example:
aircraft). Do not expose the battery charger or adapter to direct sunlight or use it in places with high humidity, such as a bathroom. Never store your device in temperatures less than -4F (-20C) or greater than 122F (50C). Do not use harsh chemicals (such as alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) or detergents to clean your device. There is a risk of this causing a fire. Do not drop, strike, or shake your device severely. Such actions may harm the internal circuit boards of the device. Do not use your device in high explosive areas as the device may generate sparks. Do not damage the power cord by bending, twisting, pulling, or heating. Do not use the plug if it is loose as it may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not place any heavy items on the power cord. Do not allow the power cord to be crimped as it may cause fire or electric shock. Do not handle the device with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause an electric shock or seriously damage your device. Do not disassemble the device. Only use the batteries, antennas, and chargers provided by LG. The warranty will not be applied to products provided by other suppliers. 9 Only authorized personnel should service the device and its accessories. Faulty installation or service may result in accidents and consequently invalidate the warranty. Use accessories, such as earphones and headsets, with caution. Ensure that cables are tucked away safely and do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. FCC RF Exposure Information WARNING Read this information before operating the device. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States, with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326, adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. The design of this device complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards. CAUTION Use only the supplied and approved antenna. Use of unauthorized antennas or modifications could impair call quality, damage the device, void your warranty and/or result in violation of FCC regulations. Do not use the device with a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with skin, a minor burn may result. Contact your local dealer for a replacement antenna. 10 Body-worn Operation This device was tested for typical body-worn operations with the back of the device kept 0cm (0inches) between the users body and the back of the device. FCC Part 15 Class B/IC RSS-Gen Compliance This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and IC RSS Gen requirements for Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cautions for Battery Do not disassemble. Do not short-circuit. Do not expose to high temperature: 140F (60C). Do not incinerate. Battery Disposal Please dispose of your battery properly or bring to your local wireless carrier for recycling. Your device contains an internal battery. Do not dispose of your battery by fire or with hazardous or flammable materials. 11 Adapter (Charger) Cautions Using the wrong battery charger could damage your device and void your warranty. The adapter or battery charger is intended for indoor use only. Do not expose the adapter or battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in places with high humidity, such as the bathroom. Avoid damage to your hearing Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sounds for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the device close to your ear. We also recommend that music and volumes are set to a reasonable level. If you are listening to music whilst out and about, please ensure that the volume is at a reasonable level so that you are aware of your surroundings. This is particularly imperative when attempting to cross the street. 12 Safety Guidelines TIA Safety Information Provided herein is the complete TIA Safety Information for Wireless Handheld devices. Inclusion of the text covering Pacemakers, Hearing Aids, and Other Medical Devices is required in the owners manual for CTIA Certification. Use of the remaining TIA language is encouraged when appropriate. Exposure to Radio Frequency Signal Your wireless handheld portable device is a low power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is ON, it receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August, 1996, the Federal Communications Commissions (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for handheld wireless devices. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies:
ANSI C95.1 (1992) *
NCRP Report 86 (1986) ICNIRP (1996) Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. For example, over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies and industry experts reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
* American National Standards Institute; National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements; International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection The design of your device complies with the FCC guidelines (and those standards). 13 Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate FCC regulations. Tips on Efficient Operation For your device to operate most efficiently:
Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is in use. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of wireless devices in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. Also, if using your device while driving, please:
Give full attention to driving - driving safely is your first responsibility;
Use hands-free operation, if available;
Pull off the road and park before using it. Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless device. Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of six (6) inches be maintained between a handheld 14 wireless device and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:
Should ALWAYS keep the device more than six inches from their pacemaker when the device is turned ON. Should not carry the device in a breast pocket. Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn your device OFF immediately. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Health Care Facilities Turn your device OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may use equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. 15 Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also inform the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted Facilities Turn your device OFF in any facility where posted notices so require. Aircraft FCC regulations prohibit using your device while in the air. Turn your device OFF before boarding an aircraft. Blasting Areas To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your device OFF when in a blasting area or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Potentially Explosive Atmosphere Turn your device OFF when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, marked clearly. Potential areas may include: fueling areas (such as gasoline stations); below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities;
16 vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain, dust, or metal powders); and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag inflates with great force. DO NOT place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment, in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Safety Information Please read and observe the following information for safe and proper use of your device and to prevent damage. Also, keep the user guide in an accessible place at all times after reading it. Charger and Adapter Safety The charger and adapter are intended for indoor use only. Battery Information and Care Please dispose of your battery properly or take it to your local wireless carrier for recycling. The battery does not need to be fully discharged before recharging. Use only LG-approved chargers specific to your device model since they are designed to maximize battery life. Do not disassemble or impact the battery as it may cause electric shock, short-circuit, and fire. Store the battery in a place out of reach of children. 17 Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. If you need to replace the battery, take it to the nearest authorized LG Electronics service point or dealer for assistance. Recharge the battery after long periods of non-use to maximize battery life. Battery life will vary due to usage patterns and environmental conditions. Use of extended backlighting, Media Net Browsing, and data connectivity kits affect battery life and talk/standby times. Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions. Explosion, Shock, and Fire Hazards Do not put your device in a place subject to excessive dust and keep the minimum required distance between the power cord and heat sources. Unplug the power cord prior to cleaning your device, and clean the power plug pin when it is dirty. When using the power plug, ensure that it is firmly connected. If it is not, it may cause excessive heat or fire. If you put your device in a pocket or bag without covering the receptacle of the device (power plug pin), metallic articles (such as a coin, paperclip or pen) may short-circuit the device. Always cover the receptacle when not in use. Do not short-circuit the battery. Metallic articles such as a coin, paperclip or pen in your pocket or bag may short-circuit the + and terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery) upon moving. Short-circuiting of the terminal may damage the battery and cause an explosion. 18 General Notice Using a damaged battery or placing a battery in your mouth may cause serious injury. Do not place items containing magnetic components such as a credit card, device card, bank book or subway ticket near your device. The magnetism of the device may damage the data stored in the magnetic strip. Talking on your device for a long period of time may reduce call quality due to heat generated during use. When the device is not being used for a long period time, store it in a safe place with the power cord unplugged. Using the device in proximity to receiving equipment (i.e., TV or radio) may cause interference to the device. Do not use the device if the antenna is damaged. If a damaged antenna contacts skin, it may cause a slight burn. Please contact an LG Authorized Service Centre to replace the damaged antenna. Do not immerse your device in water. If this happens, turn it off immediately. If the device does not work, take it to an LG Authorized Service Centre. Do not paint your device. The data saved in your device might be deleted due to careless use, repair of the device, or upgrade of the software. Please backup your important device numbers. (Ring tones, text messages, voice messages, pictures, and videos could also be deleted.) The manufacturer is not liable for damage due to the loss of data. When you use the device in public places, set the ring tone to vibration so as not to disturb others. Do not turn your device on or off when putting it near your ear. Your device is an electronic device that generates heat during normal operation. Extremely prolonged, direct contact with skin in the absence of 19 adequate ventilation may result in discomfort or minor burns. Therefore, use care when handling your device during or immediately after operation. Do not attempt to repair or modify the device yourself. Your device is equipped with an internal rechargeable battery which should be replaced only by LG or an authorized LG repair center. You should never attempt to open or disassemble this device yourself and doing so may cause damage that will void your warranty. Consumer Information on SAR
(Specific Absorption Rate) This Model Phone Meets the Governments Requirements for Exposure to Radio Waves. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. * Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions specified by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. 20 Although SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. Because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels to use only the power required to reach the network, in general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified by the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g.,at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this device when worn onthe body, as described in this user guide, is 1.02W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among devices models, depending upon available accessories and FCC/IC requirements.) While there may be differences between SAR levels of various devices and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF emission guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/fccid after searching on FCC ID: ZNFV700. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) website at http://www.ctia.org/
* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 21
* Product meets current FCC & IC Radio Frequency Exposure Guidelines. FCC ID: ZNFV700 IC ID: 2703C-V700 Wi-Fi Caution!
(i) The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-
5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-
5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
* High-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. How to update your tablet Access to latest firmware releases, new software functions and improvements. Update your tablet without a PC. Select Update Center
> Software Update. Update your tablet by connecting it to your PC. For more information about using this function, please visit http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp select country and language. 22 Important notice Please read this before you start using your tablet!
Please check to see whether any problems you encountered with your tablet are described in this section before taking the tablet in for service or calling a service representative. 1. Tablet Memory You need to check your tablet memory and delete some data, such as applications to make more memory available. To uninstall applications:
1 Tap 2 Once all applications appear, scroll to and select the application you want
> Apps tab > Settings
> Apps.
>
to uninstall. 3 Tap Uninstall. 2. Before installing an open source application and OS WARNING If you install and use an OS other than the one provided by the manufacturer it may cause your tablet to malfunction. In addition, your tablet will no longer be covered by the warranty. 23 WARNING To protect your tablet and personal data, only download applications from trusted sources, such as Play Store. If there are improperly installed applications on your tablet, the tablet may not work normally or a serious error may occur. You must uninstall those applications and all associated data and settings from the tablet.
> Apps tab >
> Display > Lock screen > Select screen lock > Pattern. This 3. Using an unlock pattern Set an unlock pattern to secure your tablet. Tap Settings opens a screen that will guide you through how to draw a screen unlock pattern. You have to create a Backup PIN as a safety measure in case you forget your unlock pattern. Caution: Create a Google account before setting an unlock pattern and remember the Backup PIN you created when creating your pattern lock.
>
WARNING Precautions to take when using pattern lock. It is very important to remember the unlock pattern you set. You will not be able to access your tablet if you use an incorrect pattern 5times. You have 5 opportunities to enter your unlock pattern, PIN or password. If you have used all 5 opportunities, you can try again after 30seconds. When you cant recall your unlock Pattern, PIN or Password:
< If you have forgotten your pattern >
If you logged in to your Google account on the tablet but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times, tap the Forgot pattern? button at the bottom of the 24 screen. You are then required to log in with your Google Account or you have to enter the Backup PIN which you entered when creating your Pattern Lock. If you have not created a Google account on the tablet or you forgot Backup PIN, you have to perform a hard reset.
< If you have forgotten your PIN or Password >
If you forget your PIN or Password, you will need to perform a hard reset. Caution: If you perform a hard reset, all user applications and user data will be deleted. NOTE: If you have not logged into your Google Account and have forgotten your Unlock Pattern, you will need to enter your Backup PIN. 4. Using the Hard Reset (Factory Reset) If your tablet does not restore to its original condition, use a Hard Reset
(Factory Reset) to initialize it. 1 Turn the tablet off. 2 Press and hold the Power/Lock key + Volume Down key on the right side of the tablet. 3 Release only the Power/Lock Key when the LG logo is displayed and keep pressing the Volume Down Key. 4 Immediately press and hold the Power/Lock Key + Volume Up Key at the same time while maintaining the Volume Down Key pressed. 5 Release all keys when the Factory hard reset screen is displayed. 6 Press the Power/Lock Key to continue or either of the Volume Keys to cancel. 7 Press the Power/Lock Key once more to confirm or either of the Volume Keys to cancel. 8 Your device will perform a hard reset. 25 WARNING If you perform a Hard Reset, all user applications, user data and DRM licenses will be deleted. Please remember to backup any important data before performing a Hard Reset. 5. Opening and switching applications Multi-tasking is easy with Android, you can keep more than one application running at the same time. There is no need to quit an application before opening another one. Use and switch between several open applications. Android manages each application, stopping and starting them as needed to ensure that idle applications don't consume resources unnecessarily. 1 Touch and hold the Home Key
. A list of recently used applications will be displayed. 2 Tap the application you want to access. This does not stop the previous app running in the background on the tablet. Make sure to tap Back Key to exit an app after using it. To stop applications, tap Task Manager from the recent apps list, then tap Stop or Stop all. To remove an app from the recent apps list, swipe the app preview to the left or right. To clear all apps, tap Clear all. 6. When the screen freezes If the screen freezes or the tablet does not respond when you try to operate it: Press and hold the Power/Lock key for 8 seconds to restart your tablet. Ifit still does not work, please contact the service center. 26 Getting to know your device Tablet Overview Power/Lock key Volume keys Front-Facing Camera lens Touch screen Camera lens Earphone Jack microSD Card Slot Charger/USB port Speakers NOTE: Ensure the microphone is not blocked when recording a video or audio clip. 27 Front-Facing Camera lens microSD Card Slot Earphone Jack Ambient Light Sensor Power/Lock key Volume keys Charger/USB port Camera lens Speakers Microphone IR LED Use to take pictures and record videos of yourself. You can also use this for video chatting. Keep it clean for optimal performance. Insert microSD Card for storing files such as music, videos and photos. Allows you to plug in an optional headset for convenient, hands-free conversations. You can also plug in headphones to listen to music. Measures the surrounding light and adjusts the LCD brightness to provide a vivid screen. Press to lock/unlock the screen. Press and hold to turn the tablet on/off, restart it, activate/deactivate airplane mode, and change the sound settings. Allow you to adjust the media volumes. Press and hold both keys at the same time to access the QuickMemo feature. Allows you to connect the tablet and the USB Cable for use with the charger adapter, or other compatible accessories. Use to take photos and record videos. Keep it clean for optimal performance. Use to listen to the audio from the selected function
(e.g., music, videos, sound clips, etc.). Record your voice and is used for voice-activated functions. Used as a sensor for the QuickRemote app. 28 WARNING Placing a heavy object on the tablet or sitting on it can damage the LCD and touch screen functions. Do not cover the LCD proximity sensor with protective film. This could cause the sensor to malfunction. TIP!
Tap the Menu Key options are available. whenever you open an application to check what If the device is locked and does not work, press and hold the Power/
Lock Key for 8 seconds to turn it off. Charging your tablet A rechargeable Li-ion battery is used to power your tablet. A USB adapter, which is included with your tablet, is used to charge the battery. Before using your tablet for the first time, make sure the battery is fully charged. NOTE: Your device has an internal rechargeable battery. For your safety, do not remove the battery incorporated in the product. Warning! If the touch screen does not function while the tablets in the process of charging, this may be due to an unstable power supply. As a result, disconnect the USB cable from the device or unplug the USB adapter from the power outlet. 29 1 Connect the USB adapter and USB cable. 2 Plug the USB cable (as shown below) into the tablets Charger/USB port. 3 Plug the charger into an electrical socket."
NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. Optimizing Battery Life You can extend your batterys life between charges by turning off features that you dont need to run constantly in the background. You can also monitor how applications and system resources consume battery power. To extend the life of your battery Turn off radio communications that you arent using, such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or GPS. Lower screen brightness and set a shorter screen timeout. Turn off automatic syncing for Gmail, Calendar, Contacts, and other applications. 30 Some applications you have downloaded may cause your battery power to be reduced. While using downloaded applications, check the battery charged level. To view the battery charge level 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Settings
> About tablet >
Battery. 2 The battery status (charging or discharging) and level are displayed on the top menu of the screen. To monitor and control what uses the battery 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Settings Battery > Battery use.
> About tablet >
2 The bottom of the screen displays battery usage time and also lists applications or services using battery power from greatest amount to least. Inserting a microSD card Your device supports the use of microSD memory cards of up to 64GB capacity. Multimedia contents can be saved in the microSD card. 1 Turn the tablet off before inserting or removing the microSD card. 31 2 Place your fingernail in the cutout and pull the microSD card tray out. Insert the microSD card into the slot with the contacts facing down. Carefully push the tray gently into the device. Removing the microSD card To safely remove the microSD card from your tablet, first you need to unmount it. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Storage >
> Settings Unmount SD card. 2 Gently pull the microSD card from the slot. Warning! Do not remove the microSD card without unmounting it first. Otherwise, it may damage the microSD card as well as your tablet, and the data stored on the microSD card may be corrupted. 32 Formatting the microSD card Warning! All files stored on your microSD card are deleted when you format the card. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap Erase SD card (twice). 3 If you set an unlock pattern, enter it and tap Erase everything. The card
> Settings
> Storage. will then be formatted and ready to use. NOTE: If there is content on your microSD card, the folder structure may be different after formatting since all the files will have been deleted. Locking and unlocking the screen If you do not use the tablet for a while, the screen will be automatically turned off and locked. This helps to prevent accidental touches and saves battery power. When you are not using the your tablet, press the Power/Lock Key to lock your tablet. If there are any programs running when you lock your screen, they may be still running in Lock mode. It is recommended that you exit all programs before entering Lock mode to avoid unnecessary charges (e.g. web access, data communications). To wake up your tablet, press the Power/Lock Key . The Lock screen will appear. Touch and slide the Lock screen in any direction to unlock your Home screen. The last screen you viewed will open. 33 Your Home screen Touch Screen tips Here are some tips on how to navigate on your tablet. NOTE:
To select an item, touch the center of the icon. Do not press too hard; the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick up a light, yet firm touch. Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you want. Be careful not to touch any other keys. Tap or touch A single finger tap selects items, links, shortcuts and letters on the on-screen keyboard. Touch and hold Touch and hold an item on the screen by touching it and not lifting your finger until an action occurs. For example, to open a contact's available options, touch and hold the contact in the Contacts list until the context menu opens. Drag Touch and hold an item for a moment and then, without lifting your finger, move your finger on the screen until you reach the target position. You can drag items on the Home screen to reposition them. 34 Swipe or slide To swipe or slide, quickly move your finger across the surface of the screen, without pausing when you first touch it (so you dont drag an item instead). For example, you can slide the screen up or down to scroll through a list, or browse through the different Home screens by swiping from left to right (and vice versa). Double-tap Double-tap to zoom on a webpage or a map. For example, quickly double-
tap a section of a webpage to adjust that section to fit the width of the screen. You can also double-tap to zoom in and out after taking a picture
(using the Camera), and when using Maps. Double-tap a word to highlight it. Double-tap can also activate the KnockON feature to turn the touchscreen on or off. Pinch-to-Zoom Use your index finger and thumb in a pinching or spreading motion to zoom in or out when using the browser or Maps, or when browsing pictures. Rotate the screen From many applications and menus, the orientation of the screen adjusts to the device's physical orientation. 35 KnockON The KnockON feature allows you to double-tap the screen to easily turn the screen on or off. Quickly double-tap the center of the screen to turn the screen on. Quickly double-tap the Status Bar, an empty area on the Home screen, or the Lock screen to turn the screen off. NOTE:
You can disable this feature in the Display settings. From the Home screen, tap Apps KnockON > tap the KnockON checkbox.
> Settings
> Display >
Home screen Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to view the panels. You can customize each panel with apps, downloads, widgets and wallpapers. NOTE: Some screen images may be different depending on your region. On your Home screen, you can view menu icons at the bottom of the screen. Menu icons provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. 36 Status bar Shows device status information, including the time, signal strength, battery status, and notification icons. Application icons Tap an icon (application, widget, folder, etc.) to open and use it. Quick keys Provide easy, one-touch access to the functions used most often. Menu key Opens an Options menu with options that affect the current screen or application. This only applies when available, depending on the screen or application. Home key Returns to the Home screen (or returns to your default Home screen canvas from any of the Home screen extension canvases). Touch and hold it to display recently used applications with access to the Task Manager application. Back key Returns to the previous screen. Also closes pop-up items such as menus, dialog boxes, and the on-screen keyboard. 37 Customizing the Home screen You can customize your Home screen by adding apps, downloads, widgets or wallpapers. For more convenience using your tablet, add your favorite apps and widgets to the Home screen. To add items on your Home screen:
1 Touch and hold the empty part of the Home screen. 2 Tap the Apps or Widgets tab. 3 Drag the desired item to the desired location and lift your finger. To remove an item from the Home screen:
Touch and hold the icon you want to remove, drag it to finger.
, and lift your TIP! To add an application icon to the Home screen from the Apps screen, touch and hold the application you want to add and drag it to the desired location. TIP! You can add several app icons in a folder. Drop one app icon over another one on a Home screen, and a folder will be created. Returning to recently-used applications 1 Touch and hold the Home Key
. The screen displays a pop-up containing the icons of applications you used recently. 2 Touch an icon to open the application. Or touch the Back Key to return to your previous screen. 38 Notifications Notifications alert you to the arrival of new messages, calendar events, and alarms, as well as to ongoing events, such as video downloads. From the Notifications Panel, you can view your tablets current status and pending notifications. When a notification arrives, its icon appears at the top of the screen. Icons for pending notifications appear on the left, and system icons showing things like Wi-Fi or battery strength on the right. NOTE: The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. Pending notifications System icons like Bluetooth, Wi-Fi & battery status Swipe down for notifications & settings Swipe the Status Bar down to open the Notifications Panel. To close the Notifications Panel, swipe the bar that is at the bottom of the screen upwards. NOTE: Touch and hold an icon from the Quick Settings to view the function's settings menu. 39 Quick Settings Bar Flick right or left to scroll through the list. QSlide Apps Bar Tap to activate a QSlide feature. Slide to the left and right to adjust the Brightness of the screen or Volume. Quick Settings on Notification Panel Use Quick Settings to easily toggle function settings like Wi-Fi. The Quick Settings are located at the top of the Notifications Panel. NOTE: Touch and hold an icon in the Quick Settings Bar to view the function's settings menu. To rearrange Quick Setting items on the Notification Panel Open the Notifications Panel and touch
. You can then view and rearrange the desired items on the Quick Settings menu. QSlide apps on the Notifications panel QSlide apps are displayed in a bar on the Notifications panel below the Quick settings bar. These icons provide a quick, convenient way to multitask on the same screen (similar to picture-in-picture on a TV). QSlide displays a small application window on the screen that can be moved, resized, or made transparent. 40 Using the QSlide apps Tap any of the QSlide apps in the bar to activate it. When activated, the QSlide feature opens the application in a window in the foreground, allowing you to access other applications in the background. You can open up to two QSlide windows at a time. Indicator icons on the Status Bar Indicator icons appear on the Status Bar at the top of the screen to report calendar events, device status and more. The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the device. The icons listed in the table below are some of the most common ones. Icon Description Airplane mode Connected to a Wi-Fi network Wired headset Bluetooth is on System warning Vibrate mode is on Silent mode is on Battery fully charged Battery is charging 41 DLNA is on Downloading data Uploading data Alarm is set SmartShare music playing GPS is on Data is syncing New Gmail New Hangouts message Song is playing Tablet is connected to PC via USB cable or USB tethering is active Power saving mode is on Slide aside is on Multiple Users Only one tablet owner ID can be created, but multiple user IDs can be added so that others can log in and use the tablet independently. Each user can configure their own tablet settings, use their own storage space, and have their own app update privileges. 42 Tablet owner privileges Only the tablet owner ID can add a new user log in ID and remove user IDs. Only the tablet owner ID can access and use the microSD card. The Tablet owner can uninstall any of the user's apps. Multiple tablet user limitations All users share the same battery, internal memory, and data usage with all of the other users. The language settings set by one user applies to all of the other users. Each user can configure and use only their own content and data (e.g.,Home screen settings, Sound settings, etc.). Any user can accept updated app permissions on the behalf of all of the other users. Alarms will sound at the set time no matter which user activated the alarm(s). Messages and scheduled calendar events will be sent to notify the specified user ID only. Once a user starts printing a document using Mobile Print, the print job will continue even if the user ID is changed. Data transfer, download, multimedia play, and communication services will stop if the user ID is changed. To add a new user on your tablet 1 From the home screen, tap App > Settings > Users > Add user. 2 Set-up wizard opens to help you to set up. Start Set-up wizard. You should follow Setup Wizard when you first log in to your tablet as a new user. 3 Now you can choose a user name when you log in your tablet. 43 Slide aside Use three-finger swipe to save running apps to the left or bring them back to the display. To bring them back later, some apps may restart. You can save up to three apps. 1 While an application is open, place three fingers on the screen and slide to the left. The current screen is saved and the Home screen appears. 2 To re-open the saved apps, place three fingers on the screen and slide to the right. Tap the desired app you want to open. Tip! The Slide Aside feature does not recognize fewer fingers, additional fingers, or your palm. Plug & Pop Plug & Pop allows you to quickly choose apps to use when plugging in an earphone or On-the-Go device, such as a mouse or keyboard. 1 Plug in earphone or OTG (On-the-Go) device (i.e., mouse, keyboard, etc.). 2 The applications panel will display and you can select an app to run. 44 NOTE: You can edit the applications to display on the panel and set not to show the applications panel. Tap
>
> Settings
> Accessory. Capturing a Screenshot Press and hold the Volume Down key and Power/Lock Key at the same time for around 2 seconds to capture a screenshot. To view the captured image, go to Apps Folder.
> Screenshots
> Gallery TIP! You cannot capture a camera/video screen. Using QuickMemo to capture a screenshot On the screen you want to capture, drag the status bar downward and select QuickMemo OR Press and hold the Volume Up/Down Key at the same time. Using Capture plus to capture a screenshot This feature allows you to capture a portion of the screen in the default Internet browser. 1 While connected to Internet, tap 2 Adjust the blue box to the desired size, and then tap OK. The selected
, and then tap Capture plus. area is saved to the Gallery. 45 Entering Text You can enter text using the on-screen keyboard. The on-screen keyboard appears automatically on the screen when you need to enter text. To manually display the keyboard, simply touch a text field where you want to enter text. Using the keypad & entering text Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type. Double-tap for all caps. Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. Tap to use the handwriting function. Tap to enter a space. Tap to create a new line in the message field. Tap to delete the previous character. Entering accented letters The on-screen keyboard allows you to enter special characters (e.g. ""). For example, touch and hold the desired key (for example, the "a" key). After the desired character appears, slide your finger over it and lift it off to enter it. 46 Google account setup When you first turn on your tablet, you have the opportunity to activate the network, to sign into your Google Account and select how you want to use certain Google services. To set up your Google account Sign into a Google Account from the prompted set-up screen. OR From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Settings Accounts & sync > Add account > Google.
>
. Otherwise, touch New and enter the necessary If you have a Google account, touch Existing, enter your email address and password, then touch information to create a new Google Account. Once you have set up your Google account on your tablet, your tablet automatically synchronizes with your Google account on the Web. Your contacts, Gmail messages, Calendar events and other information from these applications and services on the Web are synchronized with your tablet.
(This will depend on your synchronization settings.) After signing in, you can use Gmail and take advantage of Google services on your tablet. 47 Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi With Wi-Fi, you can use high-speed Internet access within the coverage of the wireless access point (AP). Enjoy wireless Internet using Wi-Fi, without extra charges. Connecting to Wi-Fi networks To use Wi-Fi on your tablet, you need to access a wireless access point or hotspot. Some access points are open and you can simply connect to them. Others are hidden or use security features; you must configure your tablet to be able to connect to them. Turn off Wi-Fi when you're not using it to extend the life of your battery. Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a Wi-Fi network 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap 3 Tap Search to see a list of active and in-range Wi-Fi networks. to turn it on and start scanning for available Wi-Fi networks.
> Apps tab > Settings
> Wi-Fi. Secured networks are indicated by a lock icon. 4 Touch a network to connect to it. If the network is secured, you are prompted to enter a password or other credentials. (Ask your network administrator for details) 5 The Status Bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi status. 48 Bluetooth You can use Bluetooth to send data by running a corresponding application, but not from the Bluetooth menu as on most other mobile phones. NOTE:
LG is not responsible for the loss, interception or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth wireless feature. Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. Turning on Bluetooth and pairing up your tablet with a Bluetooth device You must pair your device with another device before you connect to it. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
>
> Apps tab > Settings Bluetooth. 2 Tap the Bluetooth switch 3 Tap the check box next to your tablet's name to make your tablet visible to to turn it on. other Bluetooth devices. 4 A list of available devices will be displayed. Tap the device you want to pair with from the list. NOTE: Depending on the type of device, you may have to enter matching codes, confirm matching codes, or the devices may automatically pair. Once pairing is successful, your tablet will connect to the other device. 49 NOTE: Your tablet doesn't support Handsfree Profile. Therefore, the use of call features with some of accessories such as Bluetooth headsets or Bluetooth-enabled devices may not be available for this device. Send data using the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 Open the item and tap OR Touch and hold the item and select Share. OR Open the item and tap the Menu Key 2 Tap Bluetooth to share via Bluetooth.
> Share. NOTE: The method for selecting an option may vary by data type. 3 Search for and pair with a Bluetooth-enabled device. Receive data using the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Settings Bluetooth.
>
2 Tap to turn Bluetooth on and mark the checkbox next to the tablet name to make the tablet visible on other devices. NOTE: To select the length of time that your device will be visible, tap the Menu Key
> Visibility timeout. 3 Pair the devices and tap Accept when you receive a Bluetooth Authorization Request to accept the file(s). 50 SmartShare You can use the SmartShare feature easily in the Gallery, Music, Video apps, etc. Enjoying the content via a variety of devices You can share your tablet's content with a variety devices. Tap the content in the Gallery, Music, Videos, POLARIS Viewer 5. Playing/Sending Play You can play the content via a TV, a Bluetooth speaker or etc. Beam You can send the content to the device of Bluetooth and SmartShare Beam supported. SmartShare Beam This allows to transfer the content feature fast via to share Wi-Fi Direct.
< Play >
< Beam >
Enjoying the content from Nearby devices You can enjoy the content from nearby devices (i.e. PC, NAS, Mobile) in the Gallery, Music, Videos app. Connecting devices Connect your device and other devices supported by DLNA in the same Wi-Fi network. 51 Searching other devices Tap Nearby devices, then you can see the DLNA-supported devices. Connect to the device to view the content. Using the content from the Cloud You can use the content from the cloud (i.e., Dropbox) in the Gallery, Music, Videos app, etc. Using the Cloud NOTE: The supported features may vary depending on the cloud. Retrieving data may take some time depending on the cloud. 1 Select Cloud in the Gallery, Music, Videos app, etc. 2 Select the cloud what you want to use and log in. 3 You can use the content of the cloud after logging in. 4 Set the cloud settings to select the app to use the cloud. PC connections with a USB cable You can connect your tablet to your PC to charge it, transfer items to the PC from the tablet and vice versa. Transferring music, photos and videos using the USB mass storage mode 1 Connect your tablet to a PC using a USB cable. 2 If you haven't installed the LG Android Platform Driver on your PC, you will need to manually change the settings. Choose System settings > PC connection > Select USB connection method, then select Media sync
(MTP). 52 3 You can now view the mass storage content on your PC and transfer the files. Synchronize with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC. 1 Use the USB cable to connect the tablet to a PC on which Windows Media Player has been installed. 2 Select the Media sync (MTP) option. When connected, a pop-up window will appear on the PC. 3 Open Windows Media Player to synchronize music files. 4 Edit or enter your devices name in the pop-up window (if necessary). 5 Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list. 6 Start synchronization. The following requirements must be satisfied to synchronize with Windows Media Player. Items OS Requirement Microsoft Windows XP SP2, Vista or higher Window Media Player version Windows Media Player 10 or higher If the Windows Media Player version is lower than 10, install version 10 or higher. 53 Contacts You can add contacts on your tablet and synchronize them with the contacts in your Google Account or other accounts that support syncing contacts. Searching for a contact 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap the Search contacts box and enter the contact's name. You can also tap a letter along the left side of the screen to access names starting with the chosen letter. to open your contact list. Adding a new contact 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap the 3 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, tap
. Select the desired account (if applicable). Choose from Take photo to take a picture using the camera or Select from Gallery. Then browse for an image and select it. to enter more specific name information. 4 Tap 5 Enter the details about your contact. 6 Tap Save. Favorite Contacts You can classify frequently called contacts as favorites. To add a contact to your favorites 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap a contact to view its details. to open your contacts. 54 3 Tap the star to the right of the contacts name. The star turns gold and the contact is added to your favorites. To remove a contact from your favorites list 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Tap the Favorites tab to view your favorite contacts. 3 Tap a contact to view its details. 4 Tap the gold star to the right of the contacts name. The star turns grey to open your contacts. and the contact is removed from your favorites. Creating a group 1 From the Home screen, tap Contacts 2 Touch the Groups tab 3 Enter a name for the new group.
, then touch to open your contacts. Tap Add members to add contact entries to your new group. Tap the ACCOUNT field to change the account(s) you want to save the new group to. 4 Touch Save to save the group. NOTE: If you delete a group, the contacts assigned to that group will not be lost. They will remain in your contacts. 55 E-mail You can use the E-mail application to read emails from services like Gmail. The E-mail application supports the following account types: POP3, IMAP and Exchange. Your service provider or system administrator can provide you with the account settings you need. Managing an E-mail account Tap the Email on the Home screen. The first time you open the E-mail application, a set-up wizard opens to help you to set up an E-mail account. After the initial setup, E-mail displays the contents of your inbox. If you have added more than one account, you can switch among accounts. To add another E-mail account:
Open the E-mail application and tap the Menu Key To switch between accounts If you've added more than one account, you can easily switch between them. From any email folder, tap the current account (at the top of the screen), then tap the account you want to access. To change an E-mail accounts settings:
Open the E-mail application and tap the Menu Key General settings to configure settings that apply to all of your accounts. Tap an individual account to configure settings only for that particular account. To delete an E-mail account:
Open the E-mail application and tap the Menu Key
> Settings > tap
> Settings >
> Settings >
.
> Remove account > touch an account you want to the Menu Key delete > Remove > Yes. 56 Working with account folders Open the E-mail application and tap the Menu Key Each account has an Inbox, Outbox, Sent and Drafts folder. Depending on the features supported by your accounts service provider, you may have additional folders. and select Folders. Composing and sending E-mail 1 While in the E-mail application, tap Write 2 Enter an address for the messages intended recipient. As you enter
. text, matching addresses will be proposed from your Contacts. Separate multiple addresses using semicolons. to attach files, if required. 3 Tap Attach 4 Enter the subject and your message 5 Tap the Send to send the message. If you arent connected to a network, for example, if youre working in airplane mode, the messages that you send will be stored in your Outbox folder until you connect to a network again. If it contains any pending messages, the Outbox will be displayed on the Accounts screen. Receiving emails When a new email arrives in your Inbox, you'll be notified by a sound or vibration (depending on your sound and vibration settings) and its notification icon appears on the Status Bar. 57 Camera To open the Camera application, tap Camera on the Home screen. Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera Switch between the camera lens and the frontfacing camera lens. Record Mode Allows you to choose a record mode to define how the video will be recorded. Settings Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on the following page. Video mode Tap (or slide) to toggle between Camera mode and Video mode. Capture Takes a picture. Gallery Touch to view the last photo you captured. This enables you to access your Gallery and view saved photos while in camera mode. NOTE: Please ensure the camera lens is clean before taking pictures. 58 Using the advanced settings In the viewfinder, tap option, tap the Back Key
. to open the advanced options. After selecting the Take photos by voice command. Defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the photo. Focuses on a specific spot. Selects photo resolution. If you choose high resolution, file size will increase, which means you will be able to store fewer photos in the memory. The ISO rating determines the sensitivity of the camera's light sensor. The higher the ISO, the more sensitive the camera. This is useful in darker conditions when you cannot use the flash. Improves colour quality in various lighting conditions. Applies artistic effects to your pictures. Sets a delay after the capture button is pressed. This is ideal if you want to be in the photo. Activate this to use your tablet's location-based services. Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location. If you upload tagged pictures to a blog that supports geo tagging, you can see the pictures displayed on a map. NOTE: This function is only available when the GPS function is active. 59 Set a shutter sound. Set the Volume Key whether to use for the capture or zoom. Set the storage location for your pictures. Choose from Internal memory and SD card. Opens the help guide to know how a function operates. Restores all camera default settings. TIP!
When you exit the camera, some settings return to their defaults, such as white balance, colour effect, timer and scene mode. Check these before you take your next photo. The setting menu is superimposed over the viewfinder, so when you change photo colour or quality elements, you will see a preview of the changed image behind the Settings menu. Taking a quick photo 1 Open the Camera application. 2 Point the lens towards the subject you want to photograph. 3 A focus box will appear in the center of the viewfinder screen. You can also tap anywhere on the screen to focus on that spot. 4 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject. 5 Touch to capture the photo. 60 Once you've taken a photo 1 Tap the image preview in the lower-right corner of the screen to view the last photo you captured. 2 Tap Gallery, then tap Always or Just once. Touch to share your photo using the SmartShare function. Touch to take another photo immediately. Touch to send your photo to others or share it via social network services. Touch to delete the photo. TIP! If you have a social networking account and set it up on your tablet, you can share your photo with your social networking community. to open all advanced options. Touch the Menu Key Set image as Touch to use the photo as a Contact photo, Home screen wallpaper, Lock screen wallpaper or Wallpaper. Move Touch to move the photo to another place. Copy Touch to copy the selected photo and save it to another album. Copy to Clip Tray Tap to copy the photo and store in the Clip Tray. Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected photo. Rotate left/right To rotate left or right. Crop Crop your photo. Move your finger across the screen to select the area to be cropped. Edit View and edit the photo. 61 Slideshow Automatically shows you the images in the current folder one after the other. Add location To add the location information. Details Find out more information about the contents. Viewing your saved photos You can access your saved photos when in camera mode. Just tap the image preview in the bottom of the screen and your Gallery will be displayed. 1 Choose the app to use to view and/or edit your photos. Tap Gallery or Photos. 2 Tap Always or Just once. To view more photos, scroll left or right. To zoom in or out, double-tap the screen or place two fingers and spread them apart (move your fingers closer together to zoom out). 62 Video camera To open the video camera, tap Camera the Video mode icon
(on the viewfinder) to switch to video mode. on the Home screen, then tap Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera Switch between the camera lens and the frontfacing camera lens. Shot mode Defines how the shot will be taken. Settings Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on the following page. Camera mode Touch and slide up this icon to switch to camera mode. Record Touch to start recording a video. Gallery Touch to view the last video you recorded. This enables you to access your Gallery and view your saved videos while in video mode. 63 TIP! When recording a video, place two fingers on the screen and pinch to use the Zoom function. NOTE: Ensure the microphone is not blocked when recording a video or audio clip. Using the advanced settings Using the viewfinder, touch to open all the advanced options. Tap to set the size (in pixels) of the video you are recording. Defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the video. Prevent shaking while video recording to get high video quality. Improves colour quality in various lighting conditions. Choose a colour tone to use for your new view. Activate this to use your tablet's location-based services. Set the Volume Key whether to use for the record or zoom. This sets the location where you want to save your videos. Choose from Internal memory and SD card. Opens the help guide to know how a function operates. Restores all camera default settings. 64 Recording a quick video 1 Open the Camera application and touch the Video mode icon 2 The video camera viewfinder appears on the screen. 3 Holding the tablet, point the lens towards the subject you wish to capture
. in your video. once to start recording. 4 Touch 5 A timer showing the length of the video will appear. 6 Touch on the screen to stop recording. After recording a video Tap the image preview at the bottom of the screen to view the last video you recorded. Touch to share your video using the SmartShare function. Touch to record another video immediately. Touch to send your video to others or share it via social network services. Touch to delete the video. 65 Watching your saved videos Access your saved videos when in video camera mode by tapping the image preview in the lower-right corner of the viewfinder. 1 In the viewfinder, tap the image preview in the lower-right corner of the screen. 2 Your Gallery will appear on the screen with your most recent recorded video displayed. Swipe to the left to scroll to your other videos. 3 Tap the Play icon on a video to play it automatically. NOTE: You can also view your videos in the Gallery app or the Videos app. NOTE: Do not to press too hard; the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick up a light, but firm touch. Adjusting the volume when viewing a video To adjust the volume of a video while it is playing, use the Volume Keys on the right side of the tablet. 66 Multimedia Gallery You can store multimedia files in internal memory for easy access to all your multimedia files. Use this application to view multimedia files like pictures and videos. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Gallery
. You can manage and share all your image and video files with Gallery. NOTE:
Some file formats are not supported, depending on the software installed on the device. Some files may not play properly, depending on how they are encoded. If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. Viewing pictures Launching Gallery displays your available folders. When another application, such as E-mail, saves a picture, the download folder is automatically created to contain the picture. Likewise, capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Tap a folder to open it. Pictures are displayed by creation date in a folder. Select a picture to view it full screen. Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image. 67 Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods to zoom in on an image:
Double-tap anywhere to zoom in. Double-tap again to return to fullscreen view. Place two fingers anywhere on the image and spread them apart to zoom in. To zoom back out, pinch them together or double-tap the screen. Playing videos Open the Gallery app displayed on video files. Tap an image to select it. Select the app to play it
), then tap Always or Just
(tap the Photos app once and the video begins playback. and select an album. The Play icon or the Videos app is NOTE:
When in video playback mode, slide the screen up or down to adjust the screen brightness. When in video playback mode, slide the screen left or right to rewind or fast-forward. Deleting images and videos Use one of the following methods:
In a folder, tap then tap Delete. and select the photos and videos you want to delete, When viewing a photo or video, tap Setting as wallpaper When viewing a photo, touch the Menu Key
> Set image as and select Contact photo, Home screen wallpaper, Lock screen wallpaper or Wallpaper. 68 Slideshow You can view your photos in a slideshow by album or by selecting all of your photos. From the Home screen, tap Gallery Tap the album with the photos you want to view, then tap the Menu key
.
> Slideshow > verify the slideshow settings > Start. Tap the Menu key
> View all files > Menu key
> Slideshow > verify the slideshow settings > Start. Tap the Back key to stop playing the slideshow. Videos Your tablet has a video player that lets you play all of your favorite videos. Playing a video 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Select the video you want to play.
> Apps tab > Videos
. Touch to pause video playback. Touch to resume video playback. Touch and hold to fast-forward in 3 second increments. Tap once to fast-forward 10 seconds. Touch and hold to rewind in 3 second increments. Tap once to rewind 10 seconds. Touch to manage the video volume. Touch to change the ratio of the video screen. 69 Touch access QSlide and display the video in small window. Touch to share your video via the SmartShare function. Tap to lock the video screen. To change the volume while watching a video, press the Volume Keys on the right side of the tablet. Touch and hold a video in the list to access the following options:
Share,Delete, Trim and Details. TIP! While watching a video, slide up and down along the left side of the screen to adjust the screen brightness. Slide up and down along the right side of the screen to adjust the volume. Music Your tablet has a music player that lets you play all your favorite tracks. To access the music player, from the Home screen, tap Apps Music Playing a song 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Touch the Songs tab. 3 Select the song you want to play.
> Apps tab > Music
.
> Apps tab >
70 Touch to find the files with YouTube. Touch to share your music via SmartShare function. Touch to set shuffle mode. Touch to set repeat mode. Touch to manage the music volume. Touch to pause playback. Touch to resume playback. Touch to skip to the next track on the album or in the playlist. Touch to go back to the beginning of the song. Touch twice to return to the previous song. Touch to set the current song as a favorite. Touch to see the current playlist. Touch to set the audio effect. To change the volume while listening to music, press the Volume Keys on the right side of the tablet. Touch and hold any song in the list to access the following options:
Play, Add to playlist, Share, Delete, Details and Search. 71 NOTE:
Some file formats are not supported, depending on the device software. If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. Music file copyrights may be protected by international treaties and national copyright laws. Therefore, it may be necessary to obtain permission or a licence to reproduce or copy music. In some countries, national laws prohibit private copying of copyrighted material. Before downloading or copying the file, check the national laws of the relevant country concerning the use of such material. 72 Tools QPair By connecting your tablet and mobile phone via QPair, you can sync incoming calls, messages, and social networking notifications between your tablet and mobile phone. 1 Run QPair and tap Get started > Start on your tablet first and then run the same steps on your phone. TIP! QPair may not be pre-installed on the phone. Go to Google Play Store and search for Qpair and install. NOTE: QPair works with phones running Android 4.1 or later. Some features may be limited depending on your phone model. 2 Bluetooth connection will be turned on automatically. 73 QPair features Call Sends the tablet a notification when the phone receives a call. The notification displays the caller's number and allows you to decline the call. Message Sends the tablet a notification when the phone receives a message. Social network Notifications Displays SNS notifications on your tablet's Status bar when it arrives on your phone. NOTE: To enable this feature, turn the QPair social network notifications option on your phone (Settings > Accessibility > QPair social network notifications). Thisoption allows you to be notified of social networking notifications on your tablet. QuickMemo transfer Saves your current QuickMemo in the tablet's Gallery, and then syncs this Gallery with the Gallery on your phone. Internet connection via mobile phone Automatically connects your tablet to the Internet through your mobile phone (as a Wi-Fi hotspot). Using this feature may incur data charges. To save data usage on the phone, the phone automatically connects to any trusted Wi-Fi hotspots within range. Recent app sticker When the paired device's screen is unlocked, a sticker will display the last app used on the other device if the app is installed both on the tablet and the phone. QSlide The QSlide function enables an overlay window on your tablets display for easy multitasking. QSlide windows can be opened from the QSlide apps bar on the Notifications panel, or directly from the applications that support the QSlide function. 74 OR Tap to run QSlide. Tap to exit the QSlide and return to full window. Tap to adjust transparency. Tap to end the QSlide. Tap to adjust the size. NOTE: The QSlide function can support up to two windows at the same time. QSlide only supports the following applications: Videos, Internet, Memo, Calendar, Calculator, Email, File Manager. 1 Open the Notifications Panel and tap the desired app from the QSlide apps section. OR While using an application that supports QSlide, tap be displayed continuously as a small window on your screen. The function will 2 Slide to adjust the transparency level. And drag the QSlide title bar to move it to another position on the screen. 75 QuickMemo The QuickMemo feature allows you to create memos and capture screen shots. Capture screens, draw on them, and share them with family and friends with QuickMemo. Creating a QuickMemo 1 Access the QuickMemo feature, slide the Status Bar downwards and touch
. OR Press both of the Volume Keys at the same time for one second. 2 Select the desired menu option from Pen type, Colour, and Eraser. Then create a memo. 3 Tap to save the memo. To exit QuickMemo at any time, tap the Back Key
. 76 NOTE:
Please use a fingertip while using the QuickMemo. Do not use your fingernail. Using the QuickMemo options The following options are available in the QuickMemo toolbar at the top of the screen. Touch to keep the current memo on the screen and use the tablet simultaneously. Selects whether to use the background screen or not. Allows you to undo and redo previous actions. Selects the pen type and the colour. Erases the memo that you created. Touch to send your memo to others or share it via social network services. Saves the memo in the Notebook or Gallery. Viewing the saved QuickMemo From the Home screen, tap Apps QuickMemo album.
> Gallery and select the 77 QuickRemote QuickRemote turns your tablet into a Universal Remote for your home TV, DVD or Blu-ray. NOTE: QuickRemote may not be available for some devices and areas. To open the QuickRemote application and set up your QuickRemote(s) 1 From the Home screen, tap the Apps
> App tab > QuickRemote You can also perform the initial set up of your QuickRemote from the Notifications Panel. Swipe the Status Bar downward, tap the QuickRemote icon
. 2 Touch to select a room type and touch to add the device. 3 Select the type and brand of device, then follow the on-screen instructions to configure the device(s). 78 NOTE: The QuickRemote operates the same way as an ordinary infrared
(IR) remote control in your region or country. Be careful not to cover the infrared sensor at the top of the tablet when you use the QuickRemote function. This function may not be supported depending on the model, the manufacturer or service company. Using QuickRemote 1 From the Home screen, tap the Apps
> QuickRemote to open a QuickRemote bar with all of the remotes you set up. 2 Select the remote you want by tapping its type/name at the top of the QuickRemote bar. 3 Tap the buttons on the displayed remote. NOTE: When adding remote control of TV, QuickRemote could use the INPUT button to configure appropriate remote control. When configuring the INPUT button, input source of TV could be changed. To reset input source of your TV, tap the INPUT button on QuickRemote several times
(depending on the number of devices connected to the TV). QuickRemote options To access the QuickRemote Options menu, tap the Menu Key Front Touch Keys bar) to select the desired option.
(in the NOTE: While playing music in the background, pressing any QuickRemote button will mute the sound for a second. 79 QuickTranslator Simply aim the camera of your smart tablet at the foreign sentence you want to understand. You can get the real-time translation anywhere and anytime. You can buy additional dictionaries for offline translation from the Google Play Store. Home language. Destination language. Switches to Voice mode. Tap the language button, then speak. Translation of a written word. Translation of a written sentence. Translation of a paragraph. Accesses the QuickTranslator settings. You can set the home and destination languages here. 1 Touch
> Apps tab > QuickTranslator 2 Tap the translation format. Choose from 3 Tap the Settings icon and set the home and destination languages. 4 Hold the tablet toward the subject you want to translate for a few seconds.
, Word, Line, or Block. NOTE: Only one dictionary is provided free of charge. Additional dictionaries must be purchased. Please select from the list below the dictionary you would like to install as your complimentary dictionary. 80 NOTE: There may be a difference in the rate of recognization depending on the size, font, colour, brightness and angle of the letters that need to be translated. Voice Mate You can ask Voice Mate to perform tablet functions using your voice, such as setting alarms, or searching the web. When you access Voice Mate for the first time, it displays help information to assist you in learning how to use this function. To open the Voice Mate application From the Home screen, tap the Apps Using the Voice Mate application 1 Open the Voice Mate application. 2 Tap the Speak icon
(at the bottom of the screen) to turn it on. Say
> Voice Mate
. what you want it to do for you. If you say Wake me up at 6 AM", Voice Mate will set the alarm for that time. NOTE: Access the Voice Mate settings to checkmark Skip confirmation so that found exact name (or number) match requests will be executed without confirming it first. 81 Voice Mate Icons The following Voice Mate icons are displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Tap to display the Voice Mate QSlide window on the Home screen. Tap to say a voice command to execute. Tap to type a command to execute. Voice Mate Options menu Tap the Menu Key Help. to access the Options menu to select Settings or NOTE:
When the language setting for Voice Mate is not the same as the default language setting on your tablet, some commands such as launching apps may not work. When entering text, you can only use letters or numbers. Voice Mate recognizes your speech better when you speak slowly. You can view examples of various commands by swiping the Voice Mate main screen to the left. Alarm Setting your alarm 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Set the desired alarm time. 3 Set Repeat, Snooze duration, Vibration, Alarm sound, Alarm volume, Auto
> Apps tab > Alarm/Clock
>
. app starter, Puzzle lock and Memo. 4 Touch Save. 82 NOTE: To change alarm settings in the alarm list screen, touch the Menu Key and select Settings. Calculator Using your calculator 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Touch the number keys to enter numbers. 3 For simple calculations, touch the function you want to perform
> Apps tab > Calculator
.
(
,
, or
) followed by
. NOTE:
For more complex calculations, touch the Menu Key Scientific calculator, then choose the desired function.
, select the To view the calculation history, tap Menu Key
> Calculation history. Calendar Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Tap the left-top button to change the calendar view (Day, Week, Month,
> Apps tab > Calendar
. Year, Agenda). 3 Tap on the date for which you wish to add an event and tap 4 Touch the Event name field and enter the event name. 5 Touch the Location field and enter the location. Check the date and enter
. the time you wish your event to start and finish. 83 6 If you wish to add a note to your event, touch the Description field and enter the details. 7 If you wish to repeat the alarm, set REPEAT and set REMINDERS, if necessary. 8 Touch Save to save the event in the calendar. NOTE: Touch and hold a spot on the calendar to quickly save a calendar event on that date. Simply enter the event name and time, then tap Save. You can tap Details and enter more information, or update the event with additional details later. Tasks The Tasks app can be synchronized with your MS Exchange account. You can create and manage your tasks using your tablet or from MS Outlook or MS Office Outlook Web Access. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps > Tasks 2 Tap the Add task icon
(in the upper-right corner of the screen). 3 Enter the Subject, Due date, Description, Repeat, and Reminder, as
. necessary. 4 Tap Save (at the bottom of the screen). Voice Recorder Use the voice recorder to record voice memos or other audio files. Recording a sound or voice 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Touch to begin recording.
> Apps tab > Voice Recorder
. 84 3 Touch 4 Touch to end the recording. to listen to the recording. to access your list of recordings. You can listen to the NOTE: Touch saved recordings. The available recording time may differ from actual recording time. Sending the voice recording 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip by touching
. 2 Choose from any of the available methods for sharing. Task Manager You can manage your applications using Task Manager. You can easily check the number of applications that are currently running and shut down certain applications. Task Manager Options Touch Stop to stop individual apps. Tap Stop all to stop all currently running apps. Tap the Menu Key to access Help, Sort by, and Settings. POLARIS Office 5 POLARIS Office 5 is a professional mobile office solution that lets users conveniently view various types of office documents, including Word, Excel and PowerPoint files, anywhere or anytime, using their mobile devices. 85 To create a New Document 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
.
> Apps tab > POLARIS Office 5 2 Register your email address on the Registration page. NOTE: You can tap Skip to ignore the registration information. to start a new document. 3 Tap 4 Tap a document type from the drop-down list, then choose a template. 5 Enter contents in the document using the tools at the top of the screen and the on-screen keyboard. 6 When you're done working on the document, tap
(in the top left corner of the screen), then tap Save and Enter the document name. To view and edit a document on your device You can now easily view and edit a wide variety of file types, including Microsoft Office documents and Adobe PDF, right on their mobile devices. Tap an office document tab at the top of the screen to search for documents on your tablet. Tap the document that you want to view or edit. When viewing documents using POLARIS Office 5, the objects and layout remain the same as in the original documents. To edit it, tap
. Google+
Use the Google+ app to stay connected with people via Googles social network service. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Google+
. 86 NOTE: This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Voice Search The Voice Search app allows you to search webpages using your voice instead of typing. 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps 2 Say a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. Select
> Apps tab > Voice Search
. one of the suggested keywords that appear. NOTE: This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Downloads Use the Downloads app to see what files have been downloaded. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Downloads
. BOX The BOX app makes you easy to access and edit your files, share content and stay connected with your files from anywhere on any device. To open the BOX application From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > BOX
. 87 The Web Internet Use this application to browse the Internet. Browser gives you a fast, full-
colour world of games, music, news, sports, entertainment and much more, right on your tablet wherever you are and whatever you enjoy. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Internet
. Tap to go back one page. Tap to go forward one page, to the page you connected to after the current one. This is the opposite of what happens when you touch the Back Key
, which takes you to the previous page. Tap to go to the Home page. Tap to add a new tab. Tap to access your bookmarks. Tap touch to run QSlide. Tap to close the current tab. Tap to refresh or stop the current page. Opening a page To open a new page, tap To go to another webpage, tap the page to view it. 88 Searching the web by voice Tap the web address field, tap the suggested keywords that appear.
, speak a keyword, and then select one of NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. on the Browser toolbar and select on the Browser toolbar and select the History tab to open a Bookmarks To open a bookmarked webpage, tap one. History Tap webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the history, tap the Menu Key Using QSlide Use this feature to access the Internet without closing the current application. While viewing content on the Browser, tap information on your tablet. To view the browser in full screen, tap
. You can then browse other
> Clear all history. Chrome Use Chrome to search for information and browse webpages. From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > Chrome
. NOTE: This application may not be available, depending on your region and service provider. 89 on the keyboard. Viewing webpages Tap the address field (at the top of the screen), enter a web address or search criteria, and tap Opening a page To go to a new page, tap To go to another webpage, tap the page you want to select it. Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap suggested keywords that appear.
, speak a keyword and select one of the
. NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Syncing with other devices Sync open tabs and bookmarks to use with Chrome on another device when you are logged in with the same Google account. To view open tabs on other devices, tap the Menu Key
> Other devices. You must be signed in to the same Google account on all devices. Select a webpage to open. Adding and Viewing bookmarks To add bookmarks, tap To open a bookmarked webpage, tap the Menu Key
> Bookmarks. 90 Chrome Options menu New tab Tap to create a new webpage tab. New incognito tab Tap to create a new incognito tab. Bookmarks Displays your bookmarked webpages. Other devices Displays your open webpages on other devices. History Displays your browsing data (webpages you've visited). Share... Allosws to share the URL. Print... Tap to print the picture. Choose to automatically find a printer on your network, or manually enter one to use. Find in page Allows you to search for text on the current webpage. Request desktop site Checkmark to access the desktop site when you view webpages on your tablet. Settings Allows you to change the settings specific to the Chrome app. Help Displays information about using the Chrome app on your tablet. 91 Settings Access the Settings menu 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps OR 2 Select a setting category and select an option. From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key
> Apps tab > Settings
.
> System settings. WIRELESS NETWORKS Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Turns on Wi-Fi to connect to available Wi-Fi networks. The list of all of the Wi-Fi networks that have been accessed. Tap one to connect to it. NOTE: Tap Search (at the bottom of the screen) to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. in the Wi-Fi menu to access the Wi-Fi Options Tap the Menu key menu:
WPS Push Button Information to connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. WPS Pin Entry Information to connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. Add network Allows you to manually enter a new Wi-Fi network. 92 Wi-Fi Direct Allows direct connection with Wi-Fi devices without any access point. Advanced Wi-Fi Accesses the following advanced Wi-Fi settings. Interactive tutorial Displays some useful tutorials for the Wi-Fi function. TIP! How to obtain the MAC address To set up a connection in some wireless networks with MAC filters, you may need to enter the MAC address of your tablet in the router. You can find the MAC address in the following user interface: From the Home screen, tap Apps
>
Advanced Wi-Fi > MAC address.
> Wi-Fi > Menu Key
> Settings in the Bluetooth menu to access the Bluetooth Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth wireless feature on or off to use Bluetooth. ON allows you to pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices. Tap the Menu key Options menu. Edit tablet name Changes your tablet name for easy identification when pairing and connecting. Enter your new tablet name, then tap Save. Visibility timeout Sets the amount of time other Bluetooth devices can see your tablet for pairing and connection. Choose from 2minutes, 5minutes, 1hour, and Never time out. Show received files Displays a list of your Bluetooth received files. Interactive tutorial Displays some useful tutorials about Bluetooth features. 93 Data usage Displays the data usage. More... Allows you to share folders with other devices via wireless connection. Airplane mode Checkmark the Airplane mode to set on. Activating Airplane mode disables all wireless connections. Wireless storage You can manage files on your tablet in the computer or copy files to the tablet from the computer without a USB connection. Make sure that the tablet and computer are connected to the same network. Then, enter the web addresses shown on your tablet in the address bar of the browser on your computer. Miracast Allows you to wirelessly mirror your tablet screen and sound onto a Miracast dongle or TV. SmartShare Beam Allows you to receive multimedia content via SmartShare Beam from LG phones or tablets. Media server Allows to share media contents with nearby devices via DLNA. VPN Displays the list of Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) that you've previously configured. Allows you to add different types of VPNs. NOTE: You must set a lock screen PIN or password before you can use credential storage. 94 DEVICE Sound Sound profile Choose the Sound, either Vibrate only or Silent. Volumes Manage the volume of Notification sound, Touch feedback &
system, Music, video, games and other media. Notification sound Allows you to set your default notification ringtone. Touch sounds Allows you to set your tablet to play a sound when you touch buttons, icons and other onscreen items that react to your touch. Screen lock sound Allows you to set your tablet to play a sound when locking and unlocking the screen. Vibrate on touch Allows you to set the vibration feedback when the tablet screen is touched. Display Home screen Theme Sets the screen theme for your device. Wallpaper Sets the wallpaper to use on your Home screen. Screen swipe effect Sets the effect when you swipe to change screens. Allow Home screen looping Checkmark to set the Home screens to scroll continuously, eliminating the need to scroll back in the opposite direction when you reach one end. Home backup & restore Allows you to backup and restore app and widget configurations and themes. Do you know? Enable this option to display the help page Do you know?
onto display an additional homescreen. Help Displays information about the operation of the Home Screen. 95 Lock screen Select screen lock Set a screen lock type to secure your tablet. Opens a set of screens that guide you through drawing a screen unlock pattern. If you have enabled a Pattern lock type when you turn on your tablet or wake up the screen, you will be asked to draw your unlock pattern to unlock the screen. Screen swipe effect Sets the screen swipe effect options. Weather animation Checkmark to show weather animation for current location or primary city set in Weather based on auto data updates. Wallpaper Sets your Lock screen wallpaper. Select it from Gallery or Wallpaper gallery. Shortcuts Allows you to change the shortcuts on the Swipe Lock screen. Contact info for lost phone Checkmark to set the device owners name to be displayed on the Lock screen. Tap to enter the text to be displayed as the Owner info. Portrait view only Checkmark to always display the Lock screen in portrait view. Lock timer Sets the amount of time before the screen automatically locks after the screen has timed-out. Power button instantly locks Checkmark to instantly lock the screen when the Power/Lock Key is pressed. This setting overrides the Security lock timer setting. Brightness Adjust the screen brightness. Screen timeout Set the time for screen timeout. KnockON Checkmark to enable KnockON to turn the screen on and off. Quickly double-tap center screen to turn it on. Double-tap the Status Bar, an empty area on the Home screen, or the Lock screen to turn the screen off. For the best results, do not move the tablet while using the KnockON feature. 96 Screen-off effect Sets the screen-off effect. Auto-rotate screen Set to switch orientation automatically when you rotate the tablet. Daydream Tap the Daydream switch to toggle it On or Off. On allows the set screen saver to be displayed when the tablet is sleeping while docked and/or charging. Choose from Clock, Colour, Photo Frame, and Photo Table. NOTE: Charging might be slow while the screen saver is on. Font type Change the type of display font. Font size Change the size of the display font. Smart screen Keep screen on when device detects your eyes looking at the screen. Smart video Checkmark to pause the video when it doesn't detect your eyes looking at the screen. Front touch buttons Set the Front Touch Keys displayed at the bottom of all of the screens. Set which ones are displayed, their position on the bar, and what they look like. Select the keys and order, the theme, and the background. Motion sensor calibration Allows you to improve the accuracy of the tilt and speed of the sensor. Storage INTERNAL STORAGE Displays the total amount of space in the devices memory and lists what type of data is using up space. SD CARD Displays the total amount of memory space on the microSD card. 97 Total space Mount/Unmount SD card Mounts and unmounts the microSD card from your tablet so that you can access the data stored in it, format the card, or safely remove it. This setting is dimmed if theres no microSD card installed, if youve already unmounted it, or if youve mounted the microSD card on your computer. Erase SD card Permanently erases everything on the microSD card and prepares it for use with your tablet. Battery BATTERY INFORMATION See how much battery power is used for device activities. The battery level displays in a percentage. The remaining time of use is also displayed. Battery percentage on status bar Displays the battery percentage on the Status Bar. Battery saver Manage the battery for the power saving items. Tap the to turn this feature on. Tap Battery saver for the following switch options. Auto-sync: Turns off Auto-sync. Wi-Fi: Turns off Wi-Fi if data is not in use. Bluetooth: Turns off Bluetooth if not connected. Vibrate on touch: Turns off touch feedback. Brightness: Adjust the brightness. Screen timeout: Adjust the screen timeout. Help Touch to access some tips for Power saver. 98 Apps Display the list of applications such as currently running or downloaded. Swipe left and right to view one of the three tabs across the top of the screen to view detailed information for DOWNLOADED, RUNNING, and ALL applications. Tap an entry to view more information, tap Force stop, then OK to stop it from running. Slide Aside You can use three-finger swipe to save running apps to the left or bring them back to the display. PERSONAL Accounts & sync Permits applications to synchronize data in the background, whether or not you are actively working in them. Deselecting this setting can save battery power and lower (but not eliminate) data usage. Cloud Tap Add account to use cloud feature. Users Checkmark to set the device owners name to be displayed on the Lock screen. Tap Add user Allows you to add new account for tablet and use Multi-user feature. to enter the text to be displayed as the Owner info. 99 Location access Mode High accuracy Use GPS, Wi-Fi, and mobile networks to estimate location. Battery saving Use Wi-Fi and mobile networks to estimate location. Device sensors only Use GPS to pinpoint your location. RECENT LOCATION REQUESTS - Displays apps that have recently requested your location information. LOCATION SERVICES Google Location Reporting Allows you to view your Google location settings. Security Encrypt tablet Allows you to encrypt data on the tablet for security. You will be required to enter a PIN or password to decrypt your tablet each time you power it on. Encrypt SD card storage Allows you to encrypt data on the MicroSD for security. Password typing visible Show the last character of the hidden password as you type. Tablet administrators View or deactivate tablet administrators. Unknown sources Default setting to install non-Play store applications. Verify apps Disallow or warn before installation of apps that may cause harm. Storage type Displays the storage type. 100 Trusted credentials Display trusted CA certificates. Install from storage Choose to install encrypted certificates. Clear credentials Remove all certificates. Language & input Use the Language & input settings to select the language for the text on your tablet and to configure the on-screen keyboard, including words you've added to its dictionary. Backup & reset Backup my data Set to backup your settings and application data to the Google server. Backup account Set the account to which you want to backup data to. Automatic restore Set to restore your settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled on your device. LG Backup service Backs up all information on the device and restores it in the event of data loss or replacement. Factory data reset Reset your settings to the factory default values and delete all your data. If you reset the tablet this way, you are prompted to re-enter the same information as when you first started Android. SYSTEM Date & time Use Date & time settings to set how dates will be displayed. You can also use these settings to set your own time and time zone rather than obtaining the current time from the mobile network. 101 Accessibility Use the Accessibility settings to configure accessibility plug-ins you have installed on your tablet. NOTE: Requires additional plug-ins to become selectable. TalkBack Allows you to set up the TalkBack function which assists people with impaired vision by providing verbal feedback. Tap the TalkBack switch at the top right corner of the screen to turn it on. Tap Settings at the to turn this feature on. bottom of the screen to adjust the TalkBack settings. Large text Checkmark to increase the size of the text. Invert colours Checkmark to invert colour. Colour adjustment Allows to display screen with greater colour contrast. Tap the switch Touch zoom Allows you to zoom in and out by triple-tapping the screen. Screen shades Set the screen to be shade of black. Mono audio Checkmark to allow headset sound routed both right and left channel. Captions Allows to customize caption settings for those with hearing impairments. Tap the switch Touch feedback time Sets the touch and feedback time. Choose from Short, Medium, and Long. Universal touch Switch touch can replace all hardware buttons. Auto-rotate screen Checkmark to allow the device to rotate the screen depending on the device orientation (portrait or landscape). to toggle between on and off. Universal to turn this feature on. 102 Read passwords Checkmark to have verbal confirmation when inputting passwords. Accessibility settings shortcut Sets quick, easy access to selected features when you triple-tap Home key. Text-to-speech output Text-to-speech output provides audible readout of text, for example, the contents of text messages. PC connection Select USB connection method Set the desired mode: Charge tablet, Media sync (MTP), LG software or Send images (PTP). Ask upon connecting Ask in USB connection mode when connecting to a computer. Help Help for USB connection. PC Suite Check this to use LG PC Suite with your Wi-Fi connection. Please note that Wi-Fi network should be connected to LG PC Suite via a Wi-Fi connection. Help Help for LG software. Accessory Quick Cover Activate the Quick Cover to turn on or off automatically. USB storage Plug & Pop Sets the Plug & Pop feature for USB storage. Checkmark the app panel option to automatically display the app panel when connecting an OTG (On-the-Go) USB cable. Tap Edit app panel to change the applications you want to make available. Earphone Plug & Pop Sets the Plug & Pop feature for earphones. Checkmark the app panel option to automatically display the app panel when connecting an earphone. Tap Edit app panel to change the applications you want to make available. 103 Dock Plug & Pop Sets the Plug & Pop features for Dock. Checkmark the app panel option to automatically display the app panel when connecting a dock. Tap Edit app panel to change the applications you want to make available. Printing Allows you to print the content of certain screens (such as web pages displayed in Chrome) to a printer connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your Android device. About tablet This menu allows you to manage your software updates and view various information relating to your tablet. Tablet name Allows you to set your tablet name. Update Center Allows you to check for app and software updates. Battery Allows you to view battery status, battery level, and battery use information. Hardware information Allows you to view the model number, IP address, up time, CSN, Wi-Fi MAC address and Bluetooth address. Software information Allows you to view Android version, kernel version, build number, and software version. Legal information Allows you to view open source licenses and Google legal information. 104 LG Backup About backing up and restoring device data It is recommended that you regularly create and save a backup file on the internal storage, especially before updating any software. Maintaining a current backup file in storage memory may allow you to recover device data if your device is lost, stolen, or corrupted by an unforeseen issue. This LG Backup application is supported between LG smartphones and tablets, other S/W or OS versions. As a result, when you buy the new LG smartphones and tablets, you can backup the current device data to your new device. If you have the Backup application preloaded on your smartphones and tablets, you can backup and restore most of your data, including downloaded and pre-installed applications, bookmarks, calendar entries, contacts, home screen settings, and system settings. You may also:
Perform a manual LG Backup of your device. Schedule automatic backups of your device. Restore your device data. NOTE: Please note that the Backup function does not support the backup of User data & Media data (Picture/Video/Music). Please backup those files using the Media sync (MTP). Connect your tablet to your computer using a USB cable and touch Media sync (MTP). Warning! To protect against unexpected shutoff during backup or restore operations, due to insufficient battery power, you should always keep your battery fully charged. 105 LG Backup your tablet data 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps Backup.
> Apps tab > LG Backup
>
2 Select the check box you want to backup and select Next. 3 On the Backup Location screen, touch Internal storage or SD card, then tap Start. 4 When all selected files have been backed up, you will see the message Backup completed. Scheduling automatic backups You can also program automatic backups for the data on your tablet according to your schedule setting. To do this, complete the following steps:
1 From the Home screen, tap Apps
> Apps tab > LG Backup
>
Scheduled backup. 2 Tap Backup items and select the check box next to the item you want to backup. 3 Tap Backup location, touch Internal storage or SD card. 4 Tap Set time to set repeat interval among Weekly, Every to weeks, Monthly and tap Done. 5 Tap the switch next to the time to activate automatic backups. Restoring tablet data NOTE: All files that are stored on your tablet are deleted before the backup file is restored. 106 1 From the Home screen, tap Apps Restore.
> Apps tab > LG Backup
>
2 On the Restore screen, select a backup file that contains the data you wish to restore. 3 Select the check box next to the item you wish to restore and select Next to restore it to your tablet. NOTE: Please note that your tablet data will be overwritten with the content of your backup. 4 If the backup file is encrypted, type the password that you created to encrypt it. 5 When all selected files have been restored, the tablet will automatically be restart. NOTE: You can set Enable encryption to encrypt your backup files for extra protection. from the LG Backup screen, and enter a password and hint in Touch case you forgot your password. Once you have set up a password, you need to enter it every time you want to do backup/restore. 107 Tablet software update Tablet software update This feature allows you to update the firmware of your tablet to the latest version conveniently from the internet without the need to visit a service center. For more information on how to use this function, please visit:
http://www.lg.com As the tablet firmware update requires the users full attention for the duration of the update process, please make sure to check all instructions and notes that appear at each step before proceeding. Please note that removing the USB cable or battery during the upgrade may seriously damage your tablet. LG Tablet Software update via Over-the-Air (OTA) This feature allows you to update the firmware of your tablet to the newer version conveniently via OTA without connecting the USB data cable. This feature is only available if and when LG makes the newer version of the firmware available for your device. First, you can check the software version on your tablet:
From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key tablet > Software information. To perform the tablet software update, from the Home screen, tap the Menu Key Update > Check now for update.
> System settings > About tablet > Update Center > Software
> System settings > About 108 NOTE: LG reserves the right to make firmware updates available only for selected models at its own discretion and does not guarantee the availability of the newer version of the firmware for all tablet models. NOTE: Your personal dataincluding information about your Google account and any other accounts, your system/application data and settings, any downloaded applications and your DRM licence might be lost in the process of updating your device's software. Therefore, LG recommends that you back up your personal data before updating your tablet's software. LG does not take responsibility for any loss of personal data. 109 Accessories These accessories are available for use with the your tablet. (Items described below may be optional.) Travel adaptor Data cable Quick Start Guide NOTE:
Always use genuine LG accessories. Failure to do this may void your warranty. Accessories may vary in different regions. 110 Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your tablet. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures No applications can be set Not supported by service provider or registration required. Contact your service provider. Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Outside temperature is too hot or cold. Make sure tablet is charging at a normal temperature. Charging error Contact problem No voltage Check the charger and its connection to the tablet. Plug the charger into a different socket. Charger defective Replace the charger. Wrong charger Use only original LG accessories. Impossible to receive
/ send photos Memory full Delete some images from your tablet. 111 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Files do not open Unsupported file format No sound Vibration mode Check the supported file formats. Check the settings status in the sound menu to make sure you are not in vibration or silent mode. Hangs up or freezes Intermittent software problem Try to perform a software update via the website. 112 LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT 1. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS:
LG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will be free from defects in material and workmanship, according to the following terms and conditions:
1. The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of purchase of the product by the original end user. 2. The limited warranty extends only to the original end user of the product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end user. 3. This warranty is good only to the original end user of the product during the warranty period as long as it is in Canada. 4. Upon request from LG, the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of purchase. 5. During the applicable warranty period, LG will repair or replace at LGs sole option, without charge to the original end user, any defective component of the tablet or accessory. 6. LG may use rebuilt, reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any product or replace a product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new product. 2. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
1. Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2. Defects or damages from abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation or other acts which are not the fault of LG, including damage caused by spills of food or liquids. 3. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship. 4. The fact that the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by the original end user of the alleged defect or malfunction of the product, during the warranty period. 5. Products which have had their serial numbers removed or made illegible. 6. Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories. 7. All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normal customer use. 8. Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies. Notes:
1. This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties, expressed or implied either in fact or by operations of law, statutory or otherwise, including, but not limited to any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. 2. Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company. 3. EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY:
No other express warranty is applicable to this product. THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN. LG ELECTRONICS CANADA, INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. 4. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
To obtain warranty service, please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada:
LG Electronics Canada, Inc. Tel. 1-888-LG-Canada (1-888-542-2623) http://www.lg.com/ca_en/support/mobile-support Electronics Canada Inc. North York, Ontario FRANAIS Guide de l'utilisateur Les captures d'cran et les illustrations peuvent diffrer de celles que vous voyez sur votre tablette. Il est possible que certains renseignements de ce guide ne s'appliquent pas votre tablette, car ils peuvent varier selon le logiciel de la tablette ou votre fournisseur de services. Toutes les informations de ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Cette tablette n'est pas appropri pour les personnes malvoyantes puisque le clavier est sur l'cran tactile. LG Electronics, Inc., 2014. Tous droits rservs. LG et le logo LG sont des marques dposes de LG Group et de ses structures annexes. Toutes les autres marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. Google, Google Maps, Gmail, YouTube, Hangouts et Play Store sont des marques de commerce de Google, Inc. Table des matires propos de ce guide de l'utilisateur ........ 5 propos de ce guide de l'utilisateur ........... 5 Marques de commerce .................................. 6 DivX HD ........................................................... 6 Dolby Digital Plus ............................................7 Pour votre scurit ...................................... 8 Directives de scurit ................................15 Avertissement important .........................27 Utilisation de la tablette ..........................32 Prsentation de la tablette ..........................32 Charger la tablette .......................................34 Optimisation de la dure de vie de la batterie ..........................................................36 Pour augmenter la dure de charge de votre batterie ..................................................36 Pour voir le niveau de charge de la batterie ....................................................................36 Pour surveiller et contrler l'utilisation de la batterie ........................................................36 Insertion de la carte microSD .....................37 Retrait de la cartemicroSD ........................38 Formatage de la carte microSD .................38 Verrouillage et dverrouillage de l'cran ...39 Votre cran d'accueil ................................40 Conseils relatifs l'cran tactile .................40 Tapez ou touchez ...............................................40 Maintenir le doigt ................................................40 Glisser ......................................................................40 Glisser ou balayer ................................................41 2 Appuyer deux fois ...............................................41 Pincer pour zoomer ............................................41 Faire pivoter l'cran .............................................41 Allumez l'cran .....................................................41 cran d'accueil..............................................42 Personnalisation de l'cran d'accueil .........44 Retour aux applications rcemment utilises ..........................................................45 Notifications ..................................................45 Balayez vers le bas pour les notifications et les paramtres ......................46 Rglages rapides sur le panneau de notifications ...........................................................46 Pour rorganiser les lments de rglage rapide du panneau de notifications ............ 47 Applications QSlide du panneau de notifications ........................................................... 47 Utiliser les applications QSlide ...................... 47 Icnes d'indication de la barre d'tat ......... 47 Utilisateurs multiples ...................................49 Glissez ct .................................................51 Plug & Pop .....................................................51 Effectuer une Screenshots..........................52 Utiliser QuickMemo pour effectuer une capture d'cran ...................................................52 Utiliser Capture plus pour effectuer une capture d'cran ...................................................52 Clavier l'cran ............................................53 Entre d'une lettre accentue .......................53 Configuration du compte Google ............54 Connexion aux rseaux et aux appareils .....................................................55 Wi-Fi ..............................................................55 Connexion aux rseaux Wi-Fi ........................55 Activation de la connexionWi-Fi et connexion un rseauWi-Fi .........................55 Bluetooth .......................................................56 Activation de la fonction Bluetooth et association de votre tablette avec un dispositif Bluetooth.............................................56 Envoi de donnes l'aide de la fonction sans fil Bluetooth ................................................ 57 Rception de donnes l'aide de la fonction sans fil Bluetooth ............................... 57 SmartShare ...................................................58 Utilisation du contenu sur une varit d'appareils .............................................................58 Lecture et envoi...................................................58 Utilisation du contenu sur des appareils proximit .......................................................59 Connexion de priphriques .........................59 Recherche d'autres appareils ........................59 Connexions un ordinateur au moyen d'un cble USB .............................................59 Transfert de musique, de photos et de vidos l'aide du mode de stockage de masseUSB ..........................................................59 Synchronisation avec le lecteur multimdia Windows Media Player .............60 Rpertoire ...................................................61 Recherche d'un contact ...............................61 Ajout d'un contact.........................................61 Contacts favoris ............................................62 Cration d'un groupe ...................................62 Courriel .......................................................64 Gestion d'un compte de messagerie .........64 Utilisation des dossiers de compte ............65 Composition et envoi d'un courriel ............65 Recevoir des courriels ..................................66 Appareil Photo...........................................67 Utilisation du viseur .....................................67 Utilisation des paramtres avancs ...........68 Prise d'une photo rapide ............................70 Aprs avoir pris une photo ..........................70 Affichage des photos sauvegardes ...........71 Camra vido .............................................73 Utilisation du viseur .....................................73 Utilisation des paramtres avancs ........... 74 Enregistrement rapide d'une vido ............75 Aprs l'enregistrement d'une vido ...........75 Lecture des vidos enregistres .................76 Rglage du volume pendant le visionnement d'une vido ...........................76 Multimdia ................................................. 77 Galerie............................................................ 77 Visualisation de photos .....................................77 Zoom avant et arrire ....................................... 78 Lecture de vidos ............................................... 78 Supprimer des images et des vidos ........ 78 Slection comme papier peint .....................79 Diaporama ....................................................79 Vidos ............................................................79 Lecture d'une vido ...........................................79 Musique ..........................................................81 Lecture d'une chanson .....................................81 Outils ..........................................................83 QPair ..............................................................83 QSlide ............................................................84 QuickMemo...................................................86 3 RSEAUX SANS FILS...............................105 APPAREIL ...................................................108 PERSONNEL ............................................... 113 SYSTME ..................................................... 116 LG Backup ................................................120 propos de la sauvegarde et de la restauration des donnes de l'appareil ....120 Sauvegarde des donnes de votre tablette l'aide de l'application de sauvegarde LG ............................................. 121 Planification de sauvegardes automatiques .............................................. 122 Restauration des donnes de la tablette ........................................................ 122 Mise jour du logiciel de la tablette .... 124 Mise jour du logiciel de la tablette ........ 124 Mise niveau du logiciel de tabletteLG par liaison radio...................... 124 Accessoires .............................................. 126 Dpannage ............................................... 127 QuickRemote ................................................88 QuickTranslator.............................................90 Voice Mate ....................................................92 Alarme ...........................................................93 Calculatrice ...................................................94 Calendrier ......................................................94 Tches ..........................................................95 Gest. fichs .....................................................96 Dictaphone ....................................................96 Gest. de tches .............................................97 POLARIS Office 5 .......................................97 Google+ .........................................................99 Recherche vocale .........................................99 Tlchargements ..........................................99 BOX..............................................................100 Le Web .......................................................101 Internet .........................................................101 Ouverture d'une page ..................................... 101 Pour effectuer une recherche vocale sur le Web ...........................................................102 Favoris ...................................................................102 Historique .............................................................102 Utilisation de QSlide ........................................102 Chrome ........................................................102 Visualisation de pages Web .........................103 Ouverture d'une page ....................................103 Pour effectuer une recherche vocale sur le Web ...........................................................103 Synchronisation avec d'autres appareils ...............................................................103 Ajouter et afficher des signets ....................104 Menu Options de Chrome............................104 Paramtres ...............................................105 Accs au menu Paramtres ......................105 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.06 MiB |
propos de ce guide de l'utilisateur propos de ce guide de l'utilisateur Avant d'utiliser l'appareil, veuillez lire ce manuel attentivement. Vous vous assurerez ainsi de l'utiliser correctement et de manire scuritaire. Certaines des images et captures d'cran figurant dans le prsent guide peuvent avoir un aspect diffrent sur votre tablette. Votre contenu peut tre diffrent du produit final ou du logiciel fourni par votre fournisseur de services. Ce contenu peut tre modifi sans pravis. Pour la version la plus rcente de ce manuel, veuillez visiter le site Web LG l'adresse www.lg.com. Les applications de votre appareil et ses fonctions peuvent varier selon les pays, les rgions ou les caractristiques matrielles. LG ne saurait tre tenue responsable de problmes de rendement dcoulant de l'utilisation d'applications dveloppes par des fournisseurs autres que LG. LG ne sera pas tenu responsable des problmes de rendement ou d'incompatibilit dcoulant de la modification des paramtres ou du systme d'exploitation. Toute tentative de personnaliser le systme d'exploitation de votre appareil peut empcher celui-ci ou ses applications de fonctionner comme prvu. Les logiciels, son, papier peint, images et autres lments multimdias fournis avec votre appareil sont concds sous licence pour une utilisation limite. Si vous extrayez et utilisez ces lments des fins commerciales ou autres, vous pourriez contrevenir aux droits dauteur. En tant qu'utilisateur, vous tes pleinement et entirement responsable de l'utilisation illgale des lments multimdias. 5 Des frais supplmentaires peuvent tre exigs pour les services de donnes tels que la messagerie, le tlversement et le tlchargement, la synchronisation automatique et l'utilisation des services de localisation. Pour viter des frais supplmentaires, slectionnez un forfait de donnes adapt vos besoins. Pour plus de dtails, communiquez avec votre fournisseur de services. Marques de commerce LG et le logo LG sont des marques dposes de LG Electronics. Tous les autres droits d'auteur et marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. DivX HD PROPOS DES VIDOS DivX: DivX est un format vido numrique cr par la socit DivX, LLC, une filiale de Rovi Corporation. Cet quipement est un appareil homologuDivX qui a subi des tests rigoureux pour vrifier qu'il prend en charge la lecture de vidos DivX. Pour obtenir plus d'information sur ce format et pour vous procurer des outils logiciels permettant de convertir vos fichiers vido au formatDivX, visitez le site divx.com. PROPOS DES VIDOS DIVX LA DEMANDE: Cet appareil homologu DivX Certified doit tre enregistr pour pouvoir lire le contenu DivX VOD
(vido la demande). Pour obtenir votre code d'enregistrement, reprez la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de l'appareil. Pour en savoir plus sur la procdure d'enregistrement, visitez le site vod.divx.com. 6 HomologuDivX Certified pour la lecture de vidosDivX jusqu' une rsolution HD720p, y compris le contenu en accs limit. DivX, DivX Certified et les logos associs sont des marques de commerce de Rovi Corporation ou de ses filiales et sont utiliss sous licence. Avertissement! concernant les logiciels libres Pour obtenir le code source correspondant conformment aux dispositions de la licence publique gnrale, de la licence publique gnrale limite, de la licence publique Mozilla et de toute autre licence rgissant les logiciels code source libre, visitez le site http://opensource. lge.com/. Les dispositions de licence, les avis de non-responsabilit et les avis mentionns sont disponibles au tlchargement avec le code source. Dolby Digital Plus Fabriqu sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus et le symbole du doubleD sont des marques de commerce de Dolby Laboratories. 7 Pour votre scurit Renseignements importants Ce guide contient des renseignements importants sur lutilisation et le fonctionnement de votre tablette. Veuillez lire chaque page attentivement pour obtenir un rendement optimal, pour viter dendommager lappareil et pour lutiliser correctement. Les modifications apportes lappareil qui ne sont pas expressment approuves dans ce guide peuvent annuler la garantie correspondante. Avant de commencer Directives de scurit AVERTISSEMENT Avis concernant le remplacement de la batterie Pour votre scurit, ne retirez pas la batterie incorpore au produit. Si vous devez remplacer la batterie, faites effectuer le remplacement chez votre revendeur ou un point de serviceLG Electronics agr. Une batterie Li-ion est un composant dangereux qui peut occasionner des blessures. Le remplacement de la batterie par une personne non qualifie risque d'endommager l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT Afin de minimiser les risques de choc lectrique, nexposez pas lappareil une forte humidit (salles de bain, piscines, etc.). 8 Rangez toujours lappareil loin de la chaleur. Ne rangez jamais votre appareil un endroit o il pourrait tre expos une temprature de moins de 32F (0C) ni de plus de 104F (40C), comme lextrieur lors de conditions climatiques svres ou dans votre voiture en t. Lexposition de lappareil une chaleur ou un froid excessif peut entraner un mauvais fonctionnement, des dommages ou des pannes graves. Faites preuve de prudence si vous utilisez lappareil prs d'autres appareils lectroniques. Les missions RF de votre tablette cellulaire peuvent nuire aux appareils lectroniques proximit lorsque ceux-ci ne sont pas convenablement blinds. Consultez, sil y a lieu, les fabricants des appareils mdicaux personnels utiliss (stimulateur cardiaque et prothse auditive, par exemple) pour savoir si votre tablette peut provoquer des interfrences. teignez toujours votre appareil dans les tablissements de soins de sant ainsi que dans les stations-service. Ne placez jamais votre tablette dans un four micro-ondes car la batterie risque dexploser. Consignes de scurit Veuillez prendre connaissance de ces directives simples. Il peut tre dangereux, voire illgal de ne pas suivre les rgles. Ce guide de lutilisateur fournit des renseignements dtaills ce propos. Nutilisez jamais une pile non approuve; cela pourrait endommager le tablette et faire exploser la pile. Ne placez jamais lappareil dans un four micro-ondes car la pile risque dexploser. Votre tablette contient une batterie interne. Ne jetez pas la pile au feu ni avec des matires dangereuses ou inflammables. Veillez quaucun objet pointu nentre en contact avec la pile, car cela pourrait causer un incendie. 9 Conservez la pile hors de la porte des enfants. Veillez ce que les enfants n avalent pas de pices comme des bouchons de caoutchouc (couteur, pices de connexion, etc.), car ils pourraient s asphyxier ou suffoquer. Dbranchez le cordon d alimentation et le chargeur pendant les orages lectriques pour viter les chocs lectriques et les incendies. En voiture, ne laissez pas votre tablette ni lensemble mains libres prs du sac gonflable. Le dploiement du sac gonflable alors que de lquipement sans fil est mal install pourrait causer de graves blessures. Nutilisez pas le tablette dans les endroits o son usage est interdit. (Par exemple : dans les avions). Nexposez pas ladaptateur ni le chargeur la lumire directe du soleil et ne lutilisez pas dans les endroits trs humides comme les salles de bain. Nexposez jamais lappareil une temprature infrieure 4F (-15C) ou suprieure 122F (50C). Nutilisez pas de produits chimiques forts (comme de lalcool, du benzne, des diluants, etc.) ni de dtergents pour nettoyer votre tablette car cela pourrait causer un incendie. vitez de laisser tomber le tablette par terre, de le frapper ou de le secouer fortement. Le choc ou les vibrations pourraient endommager les circuits lectroniques du tablette. Nutilisez pas votre appareil dans les endroits o il y a risque dexplosion car il peut mettre des tincelles. Nendommagez pas le cordon en le pliant, en le tordant, en le tirant ou en lexposant la chaleur. Nutilisez pas la fiche si elle est desserre car cela pourrait causer un incendie ou un choc lectrique. 10 Ne placez pas dobjets lourds sur le cordon dalimentation. Veillez que le cordon d'alimentation ne soit pas pli afin dviter tout risque dincendie et de choc lectrique. Ne manipulez pas votre tablette avec des mains mouilles pendant quil se charge. Vous pourriez vous lectrocuter ou endommager le tablette. Ne dmontez pas le tablette. Utilisez uniquement les batteries, les antennes et les chargeurs fournis par LG. La garantie nest pas valide si vous utilisez des produits provenant dautres fournisseurs. Seul le personnel autoris peut rparer le tablette et ses accessoires. Une installation ou une rparation incorrecte pourrait causer des accidents et annuler la garantie. Faites preuve de prudence lorsque vous utilisez des accessoires comme un couteur ou un casque d'coute. Assurez-vous que les cbles sont placs de manire scuritaire et ne touchent pas inutilement lantenne. Renseignements de la FCC au sujet de lexposition aux radiofrquences AVERTISSEMENT Lisez ces paragraphes avant dutiliser votre appareil. Au mois daot 1996, la Federal Communications Commission (FCC) des tats-Unis a, par lintermdiaire d un document intitul Report and Order FCC 96-326, adopt et mis jour la norme de scurit en ce qui concerne lexposition des personnes lnergie lectromagntique des radiofrquences (RF) manant des metteurs rglements par la FCC. Ces directives sont conformes aux normes de scurit tablies auparavant par 11 les organismes de normalisation amricains et internationaux: Laconception de cet appareil est conforme aux directives de la FCC ainsi qu ces normes internationales. MISE EN GARDE Nutilisez que lantenne approuve fournie. Lutilisation dantennes non approuves ainsi que les modifications non autorises peuvent affecter la qualit des appels, endommager lappareil, annuler la garantie ou contrevenir aux rglements de la FCC. Nutilisez pas lappareil si lantenne est endommage. Une antenne endommage qui entre en contact avec la peau peut provoquer une brlure lgre. Communiquez, au besoin, avec votre fournisseur pour obtenir une antenne de rechange. Utilisation comme appareil portatif Ce tablette a t teste en vue dune utilisation type comme appareil portatif, avec une distance de 0cm (0pouces) entre larrire de lappareil et le corps de lutilisateur. Conformit aux normes FCC Part 15 Class B/IC RSS-Gen Cet appareil et ses accessoires se conforment aux normes FCC Part 15 Class B de la Federal Communications Commission et aux exigences pour appareils numriques RSS-General d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) Cet appareil et ses accessoires ne peuvent pas causer l'interfrence nuisible, et (2) cet appareil et ses accessoires doivent accepter n'importe quelle interfrence reue, y compris l'interfrence qui peut causer l'opration non dsire de l'appareil. 12 Mises en garde au sujet de la pile Ne la dmontez pas. Ne la court-circuitez pas. Ne pas exposer des tempratures trop hautes: 140F (60C). Ne lincinrez pas. limination des piles uses Veuillez jeter la pile de faon approprie ou rapportez-la votre fournisseur de services sans fil pour recyclage. Votre tablette contient une batterie interne. Ne jetez pas la pile au feu ni avec des matires dangereuses ou inflammables. Mises en garde au sujet de ladaptateur (chargeur) Lutilisation dun chargeur de batterie qui ne convient pas peut endommager lappareil et annuler la garantie. Ladaptateur, ou chargeur de batterie, ne doit tre utilis qu lintrieur. Nexposez pas ladaptateur ni le chargeur la lumire directe du soleil et ne lutilisez pas dans les endroits trs humides comme les salles de bain. vitez dendommager votre oue. Votre acuit auditive peut tre endommage si vous tes expos un son fort pendant des longues priodes de temps. Par consquent, nous vous recommandons de ne pas allumer ou teindre le combin prs de votre oreille. Nous vous recommandons aussi de rgler le volume de la musique et des appels un niveau raisonnable. 13 Si vous coutez de la musique pendant que vous vaquez dautres occupations, assurez vous que le volume soit rgl un niveau raisonnable afin que vous puissiez demeurer conscient de votre environnement. Cela est particulirement important quand vous traversez une rue. 14 Directives de scurit Consignes de scurit de la TIA Vous trouverez dans les pages qui suivent les consignes de scurit de la TIA au sujet des tablettes sans fil portatifs. Linclusion, dans le guide dutilisation, des paragraphes concernant les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothses auditives et autres appareils mdicaux est obligatoire pour lobtention de lhomologation CTIA. Lutilisation des autres textes de la TIA est encourage sil y a lieu. Exposition aux signaux de radiofrquence Votre tablette sans fil portatif est un metteur-rcepteur radio de faible puissance. Lorsquil est SOUS TENSION, il reoit et met des signaux RF
(radiofrquence). En aot 1996, la Federal Communications Commissions (FCC) a adopt, en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences, des lignes directrices tablissant des niveaux de scurit pour les tablettes sans fil portatifs. Ces directives sont conformes aux normes de scurit tablies auparavant par les organismes de normalisation amricains et internationaux :
ANSI C95.1 (1992) *
NCRP Report 86 (1986) ICNIRP (1996) Ces normes sont fondes sur des valuations priodiques et compltes des documents scientifiques pertinents. Ainsi, plus de 120 scientifiques, ingnieurs et mdecins duniversits, dorganismes de sant gouvernementaux et de divers secteurs industriels ont pass en revue les recherches disponibles pour crer la norme ANSI (C95.1). 15
* American National Standards Institute; National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements; International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection La conception de votre tablette est conforme aux directives de la FCC (ainsi qu ces normes). Entretien de lantenne Nutilisez que lantenne fournie ou une antenne de rechange approuve. Lutilisation d'antennes ou daccessoires non approuvs ainsi que les modifications non autorises peuvent endommager lappareil et contrevenir aux rglements de la FCC. Conseils pour un fonctionnement efficace Pour que votre tablette fonctionne le plus efficacement possible:
Ne touchez pas lantenne inutilement lorsque vous utilisez lappareil. Tout contact avec lantenne peut affecter la qualit des appels et entraner un fonctionnement de lappareil un niveau de puissance plus lev que ncessaire. Conduite automobile Vrifiez les lois et la rglementation en vigueur aux endroits o vous utilisez votre tablette sans fil. Respectez toujours ces rglements. Par ailleurs, si vous utilisez votre tablette lorsque vous conduisez:
Accordez toute votre attention la conduite de votre vhicule; votre responsabilit principale est la prudence au volant ;
Utilisez le mode mains libres, si vous avez accs cette fonction ;
Si les conditions de la circulation lexigent, arrtez vous et stationnez votre vhicule avant deffectuer ou de rpondre un appel. 16 Appareils lectroniques La plupart des appareils lectroniques modernes sont blinds contre les signaux RF. Cependant, il arrive que certains appareils lectroniques ne sont pas protgs contre les signaux RF mis par votre tablette. Stimulateurs cardiaques La Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommande une distance de 15 cm (6 po) entre un tablette sans fil portatif et un stimulateur cardiaque pour viter les interfrences potentielles. Ces recommandations sont conformes aux recherches indpendantes et aux recommandations des travaux de recherche sur les technologies sans fil. Les personnes portant un stimulateur cardiaque:
doivent TOUJOURS tenir le tablette une distance dau moins 15 cm de leur stimulateur cardiaque lorsque le tablette est SOUS TENSION;
ne doivent pas transporter leur tablette dans une poche poitrine. doivent utiliser loreille situe de lautre ct de leur stimulateur cardiaque afin de minimiser les risques dinterfrences. doivent, si elles ont quelque motif que ce soit de souponner la prsence d interfrences, TEINDRE leur tablette sur-le-champ. Prothses auditives Certains tablettes numriques sans fil crent des interfrences avec certaines prothses auditives. Dans un tel cas, vous devez consulter votre fournisseur de services. 17 Autres appareils mdicaux Si vous utilisez tout autre appareil mdical, consultez son fabricant pour savoir si lappareil en question est convenablement blind contre lnergie des radiofrquences externes. Votre mdecin pourra galement vous aider obtenir ce renseignement. tablissements de soins de sant teignez toujours votre tablette dans les tablissements de soins de sant lorsque les rglements affichs vous invitent le faire. Les hpitaux et autres tablissements de soins de sant utilisent parfois des appareils sensibles lnergie des radiofrquences externes. Vhicules Dans les vhicules, les signaux RF peuvent affecter les systmes lectroniques mal installs ou insuffisamment blinds. Vrifiez ce quil en est auprs du fabricant ou du reprsentant. Vous devez galement consulter le fabricant de tout matriel ajout votre vhicule. Avis affichs teignez votre appareil dans les tablissements o des avis vous invitent le faire. 18 Avion La rglementation de la FCC interdit lutilisation des tablettes bord des avions. Mettez toujours votre appareil HORS TENSION lorsque vous montez bord dun avion. Zones de dynamitage Pour viter de crer des interfrences lors doprations de dynamitage, TEIGNEZ votre tablette lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de dynamitage ou dans toutes zones o on vous invite dsactivez les communications radio bidirectionnelles. Obissez toutes les consignes et toutes les directives affiches. Zone avec risque de dflagration TEIGNEZ votre tablette dans les zones o il y a risque de dflagration;
obissez toutes les consignes et toutes les directives affiches. Dans ces telles zones, une tincelle peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie entranant des blessures, voire la mort. Ces zones sont habituellement, mais pas toujours, clairement identifies. Parmi celles-ci on notera les postes de ravitaillement (stations-service, par exemple), les cales de bateaux, les installations de transfert ou de stockage de combustibles ou de produits chimiques, les vhicules utilisant des gaz de ptrole liqufi (comme le propane ou le butane), les zones o des produits chimiques ou des particules (poussires de grain ou autre, poudres mtalliques) sont prsents dans latmosphre ainsi que toutes autres zones o vous devriez normalement arrter le moteur de votre vhicule. 19 Vhicules dots de coussins gonflables Lorsquils se gonflent, les coussins gonflables produisent un fort impact. NE PLACEZ PAS dobjets, y compris les appareils sans fil installs ou portatifs, au-dessus dun compartiment de coussin gonflable ni dans la zone de dploiement du coussin. Le gonflement de tels coussins dans un vhicule o un appareil sans fil est mal install peut entraner des blessures graves. Consignes de scurit Veuillez lire et suivre les directives suivantes afin dutiliser votre appareil de faon sre et dviter de lendommager. Aprs avoir lu ce guide, conservez-
le dans un endroit facile daccs. Scurit pour ladaptateur et le chargeur Le chargeur et ladaptateur sont conus pour tre utiliss lintrieur seulement. Information sur la batterie et soins de la batterie Veuillez jeter la batterie de faon approprie ou rapportez-la votre fournisseur de services sans fil pour quil la recycle. Il nest pas ncessaire que la batterie soit compltement dcharge avant de la recharger. Utilisez uniquement un chargeur approuv par LG et conu pour votre modle de tablette; les chargeurs sont conus pour maximiser la dure de vie de la batterie. 20 Ne dmontez pas la batterie et veillez la protger des chocs pour viter tout risque de choc lectrique, de court-circuit et dincendie. Conservez la batterie hors de la porte des enfants. Veuillez ce que les contacts de mtal demeurent propres. Lorsque la batterie noffre plus un rendement acceptable, remplacez-la. Si vous devez remplacer la batterie, faites effectuer le remplacement chez votre revendeur ou un point de service LG Electronics agr. Pour maximiser la vie de la batterie, rechargez-l aprs une longue priode dinactivit. La dure de vie de la batterie varie selon les habitudes dutilisation et les conditions environnementales. Une utilisation intensive du rtroclairage, du navigateur Media Net ou de la trousse de connexion pour transmission de donnes diminue la dure de vie de la batterie ainsi que le temps dattente et de conversation. La dure de vie de la batterie dpend de la configuration du rseau, des paramtres du produit, des habitudes dutilisation, ltat de la batterie et des conditions environnantes. Explosion, choc et incendie Ne rangez pas votre appareil dans les endroits excessivement poussireux et veillez que le cordon dalimentation se trouve la distance minimale prescrite de toute source de chaleur. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de nettoyer votre tablette et nettoyez les broches du cordons lorsquelles sont sales. Lorsque vous utilisez le cordon dalimentation, assurez-vous que la fiche est bien branche. Une fiche mal branche peut provoquer une chaleur excessive, voire un incendie. 21 Si vous placez votre tablette dans une poche ou un sac sans avoir couvert la prise dalimentation, des articles en mtal peuvent court-circuiter lappareil. Couvrez toujours la prise lorsquelle nest pas utilise. Ne court-circuitez pas la pile. Les articles de mtal, comme les pices de monnaie, les trombones ou les stylos peuvent court-circuiter les ples +
et de la batterie (bandes de mtal de la batterie) lorsque vous bougez. Un court-circuit des ples peut endommager la batterie et causer une explosion. Avis gnral Nutilisez pas de batterie endommage et ne placez pas la batterie dans votre bouche car cela pourrait causer des blessures graves. Ne placez pas darticles comportant des composantes magntiques (carte de crdit, carte tlphonique, livret de banque) prs de votre tablette. Le magntisme du tablette peut endommager les donnes dans la bande magntique. Pendant un appel trs long, la qualit de la transmission risque dtre affecte en raison de la chaleur produite par l'appareil. Lorsque vous nutilisez pas le tablette pendant une longue priode, entreposez-le dans un endroit sr et dbranchez le cordon dalimentation. Si vous utilisez votre tablette proximit dun rcepteur (p. ex., une tlvision ou une radio), il risque de se produire des interfrences avec le tablette. Nutilisez pas le tablette si l'antenne est endommage. En cas de contact avec la peau, une antenne endommage pourrait causer des brlures lgres. Veuillez vous adresser un centre de service LG autoris pour le remplacement de lantenne endommage. 22 Ne plongez pas le tablette dans leau. Si cela se produit, fermez immdiatement le tablette. Si le tablette ne fonctionne plus, faites-le rparer dans un centre de service LG autoris. Ne peignez pas votre tablette. Les donnes enregistres dans votre tablette peuvent tre supprimes par une utilisation imprudente, la rparation du tablette ou la mise niveau du logiciel. Veuillez faire une copie de sauvegarde de vos numros de tablette importants. (Les sonneries, les messages texte, les messages vocaux, les photos et les vidos pourraient aussi tre supprims.) Le fabricant nest pas responsable des dommages causs par la perte de donnes. Lorsque vous utilisez votre tablette dans un endroit public, rglez la sonnerie au mode vibration pour ne pas dranger les gens qui vous entourent. Nallumez pas ou nteignez pas votre tablette pendant quil est votre oreille. Votre tablette est un appareil lectronique qui gnre de la chaleur au cours dune utilisation normale. Le contact direct et extrmement prolong avec la peau en labsence d'une ventilation adquate peut entraner des malaises ou des brlures lgres. Par consquent, soyez prudent en manipulant votre tablette juste aprs ou durant l'utilisation. Ne tentez ni de rparer ni de modifier l'appareil vous-mme. Votre appareil est quip d'une batterie interne rechargeable qui ne doit tre remplace que par LG ou un centre de rparation LG autoris. Ne tentez ni d'ouvrir, ni de dmonter cet appareil car vous pourriez l'endommager et risquer de perdre vos droits au titre de la garantie. 23 Dbit dabsorption spcifique (DAS) :
Renseignements lintention des consommateurs Ce modle de tlphone est conforme aux exigences gouvernementales en matire dexposition aux ondes radiolectriques. Votre tlphone sans fil est un metteur-rcepteur radio. Il a t conu et fabriqu de faon ne pas dpasser les limites dmission de radiofrquences
(RF) fixes par la Federal Communications Commission (FCC) du gouvernement des tats-Unis. Ces limites font partie dun ensemble complet de directives tablissant les niveaux autoriss dnergie de radiofrquences pour la population en gnral. Ces directives sont fondes sur des normes labores par des organisations scientifiques indpendantes au moyen dune valuation priodique et rigoureuse des tudes scientifiques menes dans ce domaine. Ces normes appliquent une marge de scurit importante de faon assurer la scurit de toutes les personnes, quels que soient leur ge et leur tat de sant. La norme dexposition pour les tlphones sans fil utilise une unit de mesure appele dbit d'absorption spcifique ou DAS. Lalimite DAS fixe par la FCC est de 1,6 W/kg. * Les essais portant sur le DAS sont effectus en utilisant les positions de fonctionnement standard spcifies par la FCC, le tlphone transmettant sa puissance maximale sur toutes les bandes de frquences testes. Bien que le DAS soit dtermin selon le niveau de puissance homologue le plus lev, le niveau rel du DAS du tlphone lorsquil fonctionne est parfois trs infrieur cette valeur maximale. En gnral, tant donn que le tlphone est conu pour fonctionner des niveaux de puissance multiples de faon nutiliser que la puissance ncessaire pour accder au rseau, plus vous tes prs de lantenne de la station de base, plus la puissance de sortie est faible. Avant qu'une tablette ne soit propos sur le march, il doit tre test et homologu par la FCC afin de garantir quil nexcde pas la limite fixe dans le cadre des exigences du gouvernement en matire dexposition scuritaire. Des 24 essais sont effectus en tenant compte des positions et des emplacements
(utilisation prs de loreille, appareil port sur soi, par exemple), conformment aux exigences de la FCC pour chaque modle. La valeur de DAS la plus leve obtenue pour cet appareil lorsquil est port sur le corps, comme dcrit dans le guide de lutilisateur, est de 1,02 W/kg.
(Les mesures prises lorsque lappareil est port sur soi varient selon le modle, en fonction des accessoires et des exigences de la FCC/IC.) Bien que les niveaux de DAS puissent varier selon le tablette et la position, les exigences gouvernementales en matire dexposition scuritaire sont respectes dans chaque cas. La FCC a accord une autorisation de matriel (Equipment Authorization) pour ce tlphone, reconnaissant ainsi que tous les niveaux de DAS signals sont conformes aux directives de la FCC en matire dmission de radiofrquences
(RF). Les donnes de DAS pour ce modle ont t dposes auprs de la FCC et peuvent tre consultes dans la section intitule Display Grant du site Web de la FCC (http://www.fcc. gov/oet/ea/fccid), sous le code: ZNFV700. Dautres renseignements sur le dbit dabsorption spcifique (DAS) sont disponibles sur le site Web de la Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA), ladresse http://www.ctia.org/
* Aux tats-Unis et au Canada, le DAS limite pour les tlphones mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 1,6 watt/kg (W/kg), en moyenne pour chaque gramme de tissu. Cette limite prvoit une marge de scurit importante pour assurer au public une protection supplmentaire et tenir compte des variations dans les mesures.
* Ce produit est conforme aux directives de la FCC et dIndustrie Canada (IC) concernant lexposition aux radiofrquences. Code de la FCC : ZNFV700 Identification de lIC : 2703C-V700 25 Wi-Fi Avertissement!
(i) L'appareil pour l'opration dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est seulement usage interne pour rduire la potentialit d'interfrence nuisible la co-chane de systmes en satellite mobile.
(ii) le gain maximum d'antenne permis pour les appareils dans les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz se conforme la limite e.i.r.p. ;et
(iii) le gain maximum d'antenne permis pour les appareils dans la bande 5725-5825 MHz se conforme l'e.i.r.p. les limites ont spcifi pour la course d'obstacles en extrieur et non l'opration point point comme s'approprie.
* Les radars d'haute-puissance sont allous comme les utilisateurs primaires (c.--d. les utilisateurs de priorit) des bandes 5250-
5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et ces radars pourraient causer les dommages et/ou d'interfrence aux appareils De LE-LAN. Mise jour de votre tablette Accs aux plus rcentes versions du micrologiciel, aux nouvelles fonctionnalits logicielles et aux amliorations. Mise jour de votre tablette sans ordinateur Slectionnez Centre de mises jour
> Mise jour logiciel. Mise jour de votre tablette en la connectant un ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus sur cette fonction, veuillez visiter le site http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp. Slectionnez votre pays et votre langue. 26 Avertissement important Veuillez lire ceci avant de commencer utiliser votre tablette!
Avant d'apporter votre tablette la rparation ou de tlphoner au service la clientle, veuillez consulter cette section pour vrifier si le problme rencontr y est dcrit. 1. Mmoire de la tablette Vrifiez la mmoire interne de votre tablette et supprimez quelques donnes comme des applications pour augmenter l'espace mmoire. Pour dsinstaller des applications:
1 Touchez
> onglet Applications > Paramtres
>
>
Applications. 2 Lorsque toutes les applications sont affiches, faites dfiler la liste et choisissez l'application que vous voulez dsinstaller. 3 Touchez Dsinstaller. 2. Avant l'installation d'un systme d'exploitation et d'une application libre AVERTISSEMENT Si vous installez et utilisez un systme d'exploitation autre que celui fourni par le fabricant, cela peut entraner un dysfonctionnement de votre tablette. En outre, votre tablette ne sera plus couverte par la garantie. 27 AVERTISSEMENT Pour protger votre tablette et vos donnes personnelles, tlchargez uniquement des applications provenant de sources fiables, comme Play Store. Si des applications sont installes incorrectement sur votre tablette, celle-ci pourrait ne pas fonctionner normalement ou une erreur grave pourrait se produire. Vous devez dsinstaller ces applications et supprimer toutes les donnes et tous les paramtres associs.
>
> onglet Applications > Paramtres 3. Utilisation d'un schma de dverrouillage Permet de dfinir un schma de dverrouillage pour protger votre tablette. Appuyez sur
> Verrouiller l'cran > cran de vrouillage > Schma. Ceci ouvre un cran qui vous indique pas pas comme dessiner un schma de dverrouillage de l'cran. Vous devez dfinir un codePIN de secours qui servira au cas o vous oublieriez votre schma de verrouillage. Mise en garde: Avant de dfinir un schma de dverrouillage, crez un compte Google et mmorisez le codePIN de secours que vous avez dfini lors de la cration du schma de verrouillage.
> cran AVERTISSEMENT Prcautions prendre lors de l'utilisation du schma de verrouillage. Il est trs important de vous souvenir de votre schma de dverrouillage. Vous ne pourrez plus accder votre tablette si vous entrez un schma incorrect cinq fois de suite. Vous avez droit cinq tentatives pour entrer le bon schma de dverrouillage, codePIN ou mot de passe. Si vous chouez cinq fois, vous pouvez ressayer aprs 30secondes. 28 En cas d'oubli de votre schma de dverrouillage, codePIN ou mot de passe:
< Si vous avez oubli votre schma >
Si vous vous connectez votre compte Google partir de votre tablette, mais que vous entrez cinq fois de suite un schma de dverrouillage erron, appuyez sur le bouton Schma oubli? au bas de l'cran. Vous devez ensuite ouvrir une session dans votre compte Google ou saisir le codePIN de secours que vous avez dfini au moment de la cration du schma de verrouillage. Si vous n'avez pas cr de compte Google sur votre tablette ou si vous avez oubli votre codePIN de secours, vous devez procder une rinitialisation matrielle.
< Si vous avez oubli votre PIN ou votre mot de passe >
Si vous avez oubli votre PIN ou votre mot de passe, vous devez procder une rinitialisation matrielle. Mise en garde: Si vous effectuez une rinitialisation matrielle, toutes les applications utilisateur et donnes utilisateur seront supprimes. REMARQUE: Si vous n'avez pas ouvert de session dans votre compte Google et que vous avez oubli votre schma de dverrouillage, vous devez entrer votre codePIN de secours. 29 4. Excution de la fonction de rinitialisation froid
(aux valeurs d'usine) Si votre tablette ne revient pas son tat d'origine, excutez une rinitialisation matrielle (aux valeurs d'usine) pour l'initialiser. 1 teignez la tablette. 2 Maintenez enfonces les touches de mise en marche/verrouillage + de rduction du volume du ct droit de la tablette. 3 Lorsque le logo LG apparat, relchez uniquement la touche de mise en marche/verrouillage et maintenez la touche de rduction du volume enfonce. 4 Appuyez immdiatement sur les touches de mise en marche/verrouillage
+ d'augmentation du volume, tout en maintenant enfonce la touche de rduction du volume. 5 Relchez les touches lorsque l'cran Rinitialisation froid des paramtres apparat. 6 Appuyez sur la touche de mise en marche/verrouillage pour continuer ou sur l'une des touches de volume pour annuler. 7 Appuyez de nouveau sur la touche de mise en marche/verrouillage pour confirmer ou sur l'une des touches de volume pour annuler. 8 L'appareil procdera la rinitialisation froid. AVERTISSEMENT Lorsque vous effectuez une rinitialisation matrielle, toutes les applications utilisateur, donnes utilisateur et licencesDRM sont supprimes. N'oubliez pas de sauvegarder toutes vos donnes importantes avant d'effectuer une rinitialisation matrielle. 30 5. Ouverture d'une application et changement d'application Vous pouvez facilement effectuer plusieurs tches la fois parce qu'Android vous permet d'excuter plusieurs applications en mme temps. Il n'est pas ncessaire de quitter une application avant d'en ouvrir une autre. Vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs applications ouvertes et passer de l'une l'autre. Android gre toutes les applications, en les arrtant et en les redmarrant au besoin, pour s'assurer que les applications inactives ne consomment pas de ressources inutilement. 1 Maintenez votre doigt sur la touche Accueil
. Une liste des applications rcemment utilises s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur l'application laquelle vous voulez accder. L'application prcdente demeure active en arrire-plan sur la tablette. Assurez-vous d'appuyer sur la touche Prc pour fermer une application lorsque vous ne l'utilisez plus. Pour fermer des applications, appuyez sur Gest. de tches dans la liste des applications rcentes, ensuite appuyez sur arrt ou Arrter tout. Pour supprimer une application de la liste des applications rcentes, balayez l'aperu de l'application vers la gauche ou la droite. Pour fermer toutes les applications, appuyez sur Tout effacer. 6. Si l'cran gle Si l'cran gle ou si la tablette ne rpond pas lorsque vous essayez de l'utiliser: Maintenez enfonce la touche de Mise en marche/verrouillage pendant 8 secondes pour teindre la tablette. Si cela ne rsout pas le problme, communiquez avec le service la clientle. 31 Utilisation de la tablette Prsentation de la tablette Touche de mise en marche/
verrouillage Touches de volume Objectif tourn vers l'avant cran tactile Objectif Prise de casque Logement de carte MicroSD PortUSB/chargeur Haut-parleur REMARQUE: Assurez-vous que le micro n'est pas bloqu lorsque vous enregistrez une squence audio ou vido. 32 Objectif tourn vers l'avant Logement de carte MicroSD Prise de casque Capteur de lumire ambiante Touche de mise en marche/
verrouillage Touches de volume PortUSB/
chargeur Objectif Permet de prendre des photos et des vidos de vous mme. Vous pouvez galement l'utiliser pour la vidoconfrence. Veillez le maintenir propre pour des performances optimales. Insrez un carte microSD pour sauvegarder des fichiers musicaux, des vidos et des photos. Permet de brancher un casque d'coute (en option) pour des conversations mains libres. Vous pouvez galement brancher des couteurs pour couter de la musique. Le capteur de lumire ambiante mesure la lumire ambiante et rgle la luminosit de l'cran LCD de manire rendre l'image vivante. Appuyez pour verrouiller ou dverrouiller l'cran. Maintenez la touche enfonce pour allumer/teindre la tablette, la redmarrer, activer/dsactiver le mode avion et modifier les paramtres sonores. Vous permet de rgler le volume des mdias. Vous permet de connecter la tablette sur l'adaptateur du chargeur ou sur tout autre accessoire compatible l'aide du cble USB. Permet de prendre des photos et d'enregistrer des vidos. Veillez le maintenir propre pour des performances optimales. 33 Haut-parleur Microphone DEL IR Utilisez pour couter l'audio de la fonction slectionne
(par exemple, de la musique, des vidos, des clips audio, etc.) Permet d'enregistrer votre voix et est utilis pour les fonctions activation vocale. Fonctionne comme un capteur QuickRemote. AVERTISSEMENT vitez de placer un objet lourd ou de vous asseoir sur la tablette, car vous pourriez endommager l'cran LCD ainsi que les fonctions de l'cran tactile. Ne couvrez pas le capteur de proximit de l'cran LCD avec une pellicule de protection. Cela risque de provoquer un dysfonctionnement du capteur. CONSEIL!
Appuyez sur la touche Menu chaque fois que vous ouvrez une application pour consulter les options accessibles. Si l'appareil est verrouill et ne fonctionne pas, maintenez la touche Mise en marche/Verrouillage enfonce pendant 8secondes pour l'teindre. Charger la tablette Votre tablette est alimente par une batterie rechargeable au lithium-ion. L'adaptateur USB fourni avec votre tablette est utilis pour charger la batterie. Rechargez entirement la batterie avant d'utiliser votre tablette pour la premire fois. 34 REMARQUE: Votre appareil est quip d'une batterie interne rechargeable. Pour votre scurit, ne retirez pas la batterie incorpore au produit. Avertissement! Si l'cran tactile ne fonctionne pas pendant le chargement de la batterie de la tablette, cela pourrait tre occasionn par une source d'alimentation instable. Par consquent, dbranchez le cble USB de l'appareil ou l'adaptateur USB de la prise lectrique. 1 Connectez l'adaptateur USB et le cble USB. 2 Branchez le cble USB (comme illustr ci-dessous) dans la prise USB/de chargeur de la tablette. REMARQUE: La batterie doit tre entirement charge avant la premire utilisation pour augmenter sa dure de vie. 35 Optimisation de la dure de vie de la batterie Vous pouvez prolonger la dure de vie de votre batterie en teignant les fonctions qui s'excutent en arrire-plan et dont vous n'avez pas besoin. Vous pouvez galement surveiller la consommation de la charge de la batterie par les applications et les ressources systme. Pour augmenter la dure de charge de votre batterie teignez les communications radio que vous n'utilisez pas telles que Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ou GPS. Rduisez la luminosit de l'cran et dfinissez un dlai de mise en veille de l'cran plus court. Dsactivez la synchronisation automatique pour Gmail, Calendrier, Contacts et d'autres applications. Certaines des applications que vous avez tlcharges peuvent rduire la dure de vie de votre batterie. Vrifiez le niveau de charge de la batterie pendant que vous utilisez des applications tlcharges. Pour voir le niveau de charge de la batterie 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications propos de la tablette > Batterie.
> Paramtres
>
2 L'tat de la batterie (en chargement, pas en chargement) et le niveau de la charge sont affichs dans le menu suprieur de l'cran. Pour surveiller et contrler l'utilisation de la batterie 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> Paramtres propos de la tablette > Batterie > Utilisation de la batterie.
>
2 Le bas de l'cran indique le temps d'utilisation de la batterie et dresse galement la liste des applications ou services qui consomment de l'nergie en commenant par les plus nergivores. 36 Insertion de la carte microSD Votre appareil prend en charge les cartes mmoire microSD d'une capacit maximale de 64Go. Le contenu multimdia sera enregistr sur la carte microSD. 1 teignez la tablette avant d'insrer ou de retirer la carte mmoire microSD. 2 Placez votre ongle dans la dcoupe et tirez le tiroir de la carte microSD vers l'extrieur. Insrez la carte microSD dans la fente, contacts orients vers le bas. Poussez dlicatement le tiroir dans l'appareil. 37 Retrait de la cartemicroSD Pour retirer la carte microSD de votre tablette en toute scurit, vous devez commencer par la dsactiver. 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> Paramtres
>
Stockage > Dsactiver la carte SD. 2 Tirez dlicatement la carte microSD hors de la fente. Avertissement! Ne retirez pas la carte microSD avant de l'avoir dsactive au pralable. Sinon, cela risquerait d'endommager la carte microSD, votre tablette ainsi que les donnes stockes sur la carte microSD. Formatage de la carte microSD Avertissement! Tous les fichiers stocks sur la carte microSD sont supprims lors du formatage de la carte. 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Stockage.
> Paramtres
>
2 Touchez Effacer la carte SD (deux fois). 3 Si vous avez activ un schma de dverrouillage, entrez le schma et appuyez sur Tout effacer. Votre carte sera alors formate et prte l'emploi. REMARQUE: Si votre carte microSD contient dj des fichiers, la structure des dossiers pourrait tre diffrente la suite du formatage tant donn que les fichiers seront supprims. 38 Verrouillage et dverrouillage de l'cran Si vous n'utilisez pas la tablette pendant un certain temps, l'cran s'teint et se verrouille automatiquement. Ceci vous permet d'viter de presser accidentellement sur des touches et de prserver la charge de la batterie. Lorsque vous n'utilisez pas votre tablette, appuyez sur la touche Mise en marche/Verrouillage pour la verrouiller. Si des applications sont en cours d'excution lorsque vous verrouillez l'cran, il est possible que leur excution se poursuive en mode verrouillage. Nous vous recommandons de quitter tous les programmes avant de passer en mode verrouillage de faon viter tout frais inutile (p.ex., accs Internet et transmission de donnes). Pour ractiver la tablette, appuyez sur la touche Mise en marche/Verrouillage
. L'cran de verrouillage s'affiche. Touchez l'cran de verrouillage et faites-le glisser dans un sens ou dans l'autre pour dverrouiller votre cran d'accueil. Le dernier cran activ s'ouvre. 39 Votre cran d'accueil Conseils relatifs l'cran tactile Voici quelques conseils relatifs la navigation dans votre tablette. REMARQUE:
Pour slectionner un lment, touchez le centre de son icne. N'appuyez pas trop fort sur l'cran, car celui-ci est assez sensible pour dtecter une pression lgre mais ferme. Utilisez le bout du doigt pour appuyer sur l'option dsire. Assurez-vous de ne pas appuyer sur d'autres touches en mme temps. Tapez ou touchez Un tapotement avec un seul doigt permet de slectionner des lments, des liens, des raccourcis et des lettres sur le clavier virtuel. Maintenir le doigt Touchez un lment de l'cran de manire prolonge signifie laisser votre doigt sur ledit lment jusqu' ce qu'une action se produise. Par exemple, pour ouvrir les options disponibles d'un contact, maintenez le doigt sur le contact dans la liste de contacts jusqu' ce que le menu contextuel s'affiche. Glisser Touchez un lment pendant quelques secondes puis, sans lever votre doigt, dplacer votre doigt sur l'cran jusqu' ce que vous atteigniez la position cible. Vous pouvez faire glisser des lments de l'cran d'accueil pour les repositionner. 40 Glisser ou balayer Pour faire glisser votre doigt, dplacez rapidement votre doigt sur la surface de l'cran, sans vous arrter lorsque vous le touchez pour la premire fois. Par exemple, vous pouvez balayer l'cran vers le haut ou vers le bas pour parcourir une liste, ou parcourir les diffrents crans d'accueil en dfilant de gauche droite (et vice versa). Appuyer deux fois Appuyez deux fois pour zoomer sur une page Web ou sur une carte. Par exemple, appuyez rapidement deux fois sur une section d'une page Web pour redimensionner cette section en fonction de la largeur de l'cran. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer deux fois pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrire aprs la prise d'une photo (au moyen de l'appareil photo) ou lors de l'utilisation de cartes. Appuyez deux fois sur un mot pour le mettre en surbrillance. Le fait d'appuyer deux fois permet galement d'activer la fonction KnockON qui permet d'activer ou de dsactiver l'cran tactile. Pincer pour zoomer Utilisez votre index et votre pouce dans un mouvement de pincement ou d'cartement pour faire un zoom avant ou arrire lorsque vous utilisez le navigateur ou des cartes ou lorsque vous parcourez des photos. Faire pivoter l'cran Dans de nombreuses applications et de nombreux menus, l'orientation de l'cran ajuste l'orientation physique de l'appareil. Allumez l'cran La fonction KnockON vous permet d'activer ou de dsactiver facilement l'cran en le touchant deux fois. 41 Tapez deux fois rapidement le centre de l'cran pour activer ce dernier. Tapez deux fois rapidement la barre d'tat, une zone vide de l'cran d'accueil, ou l'cran de verrouillage pour dsactiver l'cran. REMARQUE:
Cette fonction peut tre dsactive dans les Paramtres d'affichage.
>
Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications cran > Allumez > touchez la case cocher Allumez l'cran.
> Paramtres cran d'accueil Faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher les volets. Vous pouvez personnaliser chaque volet avec des applications, des tlchargements, des gadgets et des fonds d'cran. REMARQUE: Certaines images d'cran peuvent diffrer selon votre rgion. 42 l'cran d'accueil, des icnes de menu sont affiches au bas de l'cran. Les icnes du menu permettent d'accder aux fonctions les plus utilises l'aide d'un simple toucher. Barre d'tat Affiche des informations sur l'tat de l'appareil, dont l'heure, la force du signal, l'tat de la batterie et les icnes de notification. Icnes d'application Touchez une icne
(application, widget, dossier, etc.) pour l'ouvrir et l'utiliser. Touches de raccourci Permettent d'accder aux fonctions les plus utilises l'aide d'un simple toucher. Touche Menu Permet d'ouvrir un menu contextuel avec des options affectant l'application ou l'cran affich. Cela ne s'applique que lorsqu'un menu contextuel est disponible et cela dpend de l'cran ou de l'application. Touche Accueil Permet de revenir l'cran d'accueil (ou de revenir votre cran d'accueil par dfaut partir de n'importe laquelle des extensions d'cran d'accueil). Touchez-la de manire prolonge pour afficher les applications rcemment utilises tout en ayant accs au gestionnaire de tches. Touche Prc Permet de retourner l'cran prcdent. Permet galement de fermer les lments contextuels (menus, botes de dialogue) ainsi que le clavier virtuel. 43 Personnalisation de l'cran d'accueil Vous pouvez personnaliser votre page d'accueil en y ajoutant des applications, des tlchargements, des gadgets ou des fonds d'cran. Pour rendre l'utilisation de votre tablette encore plus facile, ajoutez vos applications et vos gadgets favoris sur la page d'accueil. Pour ajouter des lments sur votre cran d'accueil:
1 Touchez la section vide de l'cran d'accueil et maintenez votre doigt dessus. 2 Touchez l'onglet Applications ou Widgets. 3 Faites glisser l'lment de votre choix jusqu' l'emplacement souhait, puis soulevez votre doigt. Pour retirer un lment de l'cran d'accueil:
Touchez de manire prolonge l'icne que vous souhaitez retirer, faites-la glisser vers
, puis soulevez votre doigt. CONSEIL! Pour ajouter une icne d'application sur l'cran d'accueil depuis l'cran Applications, touchez de manire prolonge l'application que vous souhaitez ajouter, puis faites-la glisser et dposez-la l'emplacement de votre choix. CONSEIL! Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs icnes d'application dans un dossier. Dposez une icne d'application sur une autre d'un cran d'accueil: un dossier sera cr. 44 Retour aux applications rcemment utilises 1 Maintenez votre doigt sur la touche Accueil
. L'cran affiche une fentre contextuelle contenant les icnes des applications rcemment utilises. 2 Appuyez sur une icne pour ouvrir l'application correspondante. Ou touchez la touche Prc pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Notifications Les notifications vous avertissent de l'arrive de nouveaux messages, d'vnements de calendrier et d'alarmes, de mme que des vnements en cours tels que le tlchargement de vidos. Dans le panneau de notifications, vous pouvez voir l'tat courant de votre tablette et les notifications en attente. Lorsqu'une notification arrive, son icne apparat dans le haut de l'cran. Les icnes des notifications en attente s'affichent sur la gauche et les icnes du systme, qui indiquent l'activation du Wi-Fi ou la charge de la batterie, se trouvent droite. REMARQUE: Les options offertes peuvent varier selon la rgion ou le fournisseur de services. Notifications en attente Les icnes systme comme Bluetooth, Wi-Fi et tat de la batterie 45 Balayez vers le bas pour les notifications et les paramtres Faites glisser la barre d'tat vers le bas pour ouvrir le panneau de notifications. Pour fermer le panneau de notifications, faites glisser la barre situe en bas de l'cran vers le haut. REMARQUE: Touchez de manire prolonge une icne des paramtres rapides pour afficher le menu des paramtres d'une fonction. Barre des rglages rapides Effectuez un balayage vers la droite ou vers la gauche pour faire dfiler la liste. Barre des QSilde Apps Touchez-la pour activer une fonction QSlide. Faites glisser vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour rgler la luminosit de l'cran / le volume. Rglages rapides sur le panneau de notifications Utilisez les rglages rapides pour modifier rapidement les paramtres d'une fonction (Wi-Fi, par exemple). Les rglages rapides sont situs en haut du panneau de notifications. REMARQUE: Touchez de manire prolonge la barre des paramtres rapides pour afficher le menu des paramtres d'une fonction. 46
. Vous pouvez alors Pour rorganiser les lments de rglage rapide du panneau de notifications Ouvrez le panneau de notifications, puis touchez afficher et rorganiser les lments souhaits du menu des rglages rapides. Applications QSlide du panneau de notifications Les applications QSlide sont affiches dans une barre du panneau de notifications, sous la barre des rglages rapides. Ces icnes constituent un moyen rapide et pratique pour raliser plusieurs tches sur le mme cran
(fonction similaire la fonction image dans l'image d'un tlviseur). QSlide affiche une petite fentre d'application sur l'cran qui peut tre dplace, redimensionne ou rendue transparente. Utiliser les applications QSlide Touchez n'importe laquelle des applications QSlide de la barre pour l'activer. Une fois active, la fonction QSlide ouvre l'application dans une fentre au premier plan, ce qui vous permet d'accder d'autres applications en arrire-plan. Vous pouvez ouvrir jusqu' deux fentres QSlide simultanment. Icnes d'indication de la barre d'tat Les icnes d'indication s'affichent sur la barre d'tat dans le haut de l'cran pour signaler les vnements du calendrier, l'tat de l'appareil, etc. Les icnes affiches dans le haut de l'cran fournissent de l'information sur l'tat de l'appareil. Les icnes figurant dans le tableau ci-dessous sont parmi les plus courants. 47 Icne Description Mode Avion Connect un rseau Wi-Fi Casque d'coute fil Liaison Bluetooth active Avertissement systme Mode vibration activ Mode silencieux activ Batterie entirement charge Chargement en cours DLNA activ Tlchargement de donnes Chargement de donnes Rveil activ Lecture de musique SmartShare GPS activ Synchronisation de donnes en cours Nouveau courriel Gmail 48 Nouveau message Hangouts Chanson en cours La tablette est connecte l'ordinateur par cble USB ou le partage de connexion par USB est activ Mode conomie d'nergie activ Glisser de ct activ Utilisateurs multiples Un seul identifiant de propritaire peut tre cre sur la tablette, mais plusieurs identifiants d'utilisateur peuvent tre ajouts afin que d'autres peuvent se connecter et utiliser la tablette de faon autonome. Chaque utilisateur peut configurer ses propres paramtres de tablette, utiliser son propre espace de stockage et avoir ses propres privilges de mise jour d'application. Privilges du propritaire de la tablette Seul l'identifiant du propritaire de la tablette peut ajouter un noveau identifiant d'utilisateur et le supprimer. Seul l'identifiant du propritaire de la tablette peut ajouter et utiiliser une nouvelle carte microSD. Le propritaire de la tablette peut dsinstaller n'importe quelle application de l'utilisateur. Limites d'utilisations multiples de la tablette Tous les utilisateurs partagent la mme batterie, la mme mmoire interne, et donnes avec tous les autres utilisateurs. 49 Les paramtres de langue dfinis par un utilisateur s'appliquent tous les autres utilisateurs. Chaque utilisateur peut configurer et utiliser uniquement son propre contenu et ses donnes (par exemple, ses paramtres d'cran d'accueil, ses paramtres sonores, etc.) N'importe quel utilisateur peut accepter des autorisations de mise jour d'application au nom de tous les autres utilisateurs. Les alarmes sonneront l'heure dfinie, peu importe quel utilisateur aura rgl la(les) alarme(s). Les messages et les vnements d'agenda seront envoys uniquement l'identifiant de l'utilisateur spcifi. Une fois qu'un utilisateur commence imprimer un document l'aide de l'impression mobile, le travail d'impression se poursuit mme si l'identifiant utilisateur est modifi. Les transferts de donnes, le tlchargement, la lecture multimdia, et les services de communication cesseront si l'identifiant utilisateur est modifi. Pour ajouter un nouvel utilisateur votre tablette 1 l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications > Paramtres > Util > Ajouter un utilisateur. 2 L'assistant de configuration s'ouvre pour vous aider dans le processus. Lancez l'assistant de configuration. Il est conseill d'excuter l'assistant de configuration lorsque vous vous connectez pour la premire fois votre tablette en tant que nouvel utilisateur. 3 Vous pouvez maintenant choisir le nom d'utilisateur utiliser lorsque vous vous connectez la tablette. 50 Glissez ct Faites glisser trois doigts pour enregistrer les applications en cours vers la gauche ou les ramener sur l'cran. Pour pouvoir tre raffiches ultrieurement, certaines applications doivent tre redmarres. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu' trois applications. 1 Lorsqu'une application est ouverte, placez trois doigts sur l'cran et faites les glisser vers la gauche. L'cran actuel est enregistr et l'cran d'accueil apparat. 2 Pour rouvrir les applications enregistres, placez trois doigts sur l'cran et faites-les glisser vers la droite. Touchez l'application que vous souhaitez ouvrir. Conseil! La fonction Glissez ct ne reconnat pas plus de trois doigts, moins de trois doigts ou la paume de votre main. Plug & Pop La fonction Plug & Pop vous permet de choisir rapidement des applications utiliser pour brancher un couteur ou un appareil mobile (OTG) comme une souris ou un clavier. 51 1 Branchez un couteur ou un appareil OTG (p. ex., une souris ou un clavier, etc.). 2 Le volet des applications s'affiche et vous pouvez slectionner une application excuter. REMARQUE: Vous pouvez slectionner les applications afficher dans le volet des applications et choisir de ne pas afficher le volet. Touchez
>
> Paramtres
> Accessoire. Effectuer une Screenshots Maintenez les touches Diminution du volume et Mise en marche/Verrouillage enfonces simultanment pendant environ 2secondes pour effectuer une capture d'cran. Pour afficher l'image capture, allez dans Applications dossier Screenshots.
> Galerie
>
CONSEIL! Vous ne pouvez pas capturer l'cran d'une camra/vido. Utiliser QuickMemo pour effectuer une capture d'cran Sur l'cran que vous voulez capturer, faites glisser la barre d'tat vers le bas, puis slectionnez QuickMemo OU Maintenez les touches Augmentation du volume/Diminution du volume enfonces simultanment. Utiliser Capture plus pour effectuer une capture d'cran Cette fonction vous permet de capturer une partie de l'cran dans le navigateur Internet par dfaut. 52 1 Aprs vous tre connect Internet, touchez plus.
, puis touchez Capture 2 Ajustez le cadre bleu la taille souhaite, puis touchez OK. La zone slectionne est enregistre dans la Galerie. Clavier l'cran Vous pouvez entrer du texte l'aide du clavier l'cran. Le clavier l'cran s'affiche automatiquement lorsque vous avez besoin d'entrer du texte. Pour afficher manuellement le clavier, appuyez simplement sur un champ texte o vous dsirez entrer du texte. Utilisation du clavier et saisie de texte Appuyez une fois dessus pour mettre la prochaine lettre en majuscule. Appuyez deux fois pour taper toutes les lettres en majuscules. Touchez pour passer au clavier des chiffres et symboles. Appuyez sur cette touche pour utiliser la fonction de saisie manuscrite.. Touchez pour insrer une espace. Tapez pour insrer une nouvelle ligne dans le champ de message. Tapez pour supprimer le caractre prcdent. Entre d'une lettre accentue Le clavier virtuel vous permet de saisir des caractres spciaux (ex. ). Par exemple, touchez la touche souhaite de manire prolonge (par exemple, la touche a). Lorsque le caractre souhait apparat, faites glisser votre doigt sur lui, puis soulevez votre doigt pour le saisir. 53 Configuration du compte Google La premire fois que vous allumez votre tablette, vous pouvez activer le rseau, vous connecter votre compte Google et choisir la faon dont vous voulez utiliser certains services Google. Pour configurer votre compte Google Connectez-vous votre compte Google partir de l'cran de configuration qui s'affiche. OU Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
Paramtres
> Comptes et synchro > Ajouter un compte > Google. Si vous avez un compte Google, touchez Compte existant, entrez votre adresse courriel et votre mot de passe, puis touchez
. Sinon, touchez Nouveau et saisissez les informations ncessaires pour crer un nouveau compte Google. Une fois votre compte Google configur sur votre tablette, cette dernire est automatiquement synchronise avec votre compte Google sur le Web. Vos contacts, vos messages Gmail, vos vnements de calendrier et d'autres donnes provenant de ces applications et services sur le Web sont synchroniss avec votre tablette. (Cela dpend de vos paramtres de synchronisation.) Aprs avoir obtenu la connexion, vous pouvez utiliser Gmail et profiter des services de Google sur votre tablette. 54 Connexion aux rseaux et aux appareils Wi-Fi Grce au Wi-Fi, vous pouvez profiter d'un accs Internet haute vitesse l'intrieur de la zone couverte par le point d'accs sans fil. Profitez d'une connexion Internet sans fil, sans frais supplmentaire. Connexion aux rseaux Wi-Fi Pour utiliser la connexion Wi-Fi sur votre tablette, vous devez vous connecter un point d'accs sans fil. Certains points d'accs sont publics et vous pouvez simplement vous y connecter. D'autres sont cachs ou utilisent des fonctions de scurit; vous devez donc configurer votre tablette pour pouvoir vous y connecter. Dsactivez la connexion Wi-Fi lorsque vous ne l'utilisez pas, afin d'augmenter la dure de charge de votre batterie. Activation de la connexionWi-Fi et connexion un rseauWi-Fi 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
> Wi-Fi. pour l'activer et commencer rechercher les rseaux Wi-Fi Paramtres 2 Touchez disponibles. 3 Touchez Rechercher pour voir une liste des rseaux Wi-Fi actifs et porte. Les rseaux scuriss sont indiqus par une icne de verrou. 4 Appuyez sur un rseau pour vous y connecter. Si le rseau est scuris, on vous demande d'entrer un mot de passe ou d'autres informations de scurit. (Pour obtenir plus de renseignements, veuillez communiquer avec l'administrateur de votre rseau.) 5 La barre d'tat affiche les icnes indiquant l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi. 55 Bluetooth Vous pouvez utiliser la technologie Bluetooth pour transmettre des donnes en excutant une application correspondante, mais pas partir du menu Bluetooth comme sur la plupart des tlphones cellulaires. REMARQUE:
LG dcline toute responsabilit en cas de pertes, d'interception ou de mauvaise utilisation de donnes envoyes ou reues par la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. Veillez ce que les priphriques avec lesquels vous changez des donnes soient toujours de confiance et scuriss. Si des obstacles se trouvent entre les priphriques, la distance de fonctionnement pourrait tre rduite. Certains priphriques, particulirement ceux qui n'ont pas t tests ou approuvs par Bluetooth SIG peuvent tre incompatibles avec votre dispositif. Activation de la fonction Bluetooth et association de votre tablette avec un dispositif Bluetooth Vous devez coupler votre tablette l'autre appareil avant de pouvoir vous connecter ce dernier. 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
Paramtres
> Bluetooth. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton Bluetooth 3 Appuyez sur la case cocher ct du nom de votre tablette pour rendre pour l'activer. votre tablette visible par d'autres appareils Bluetooth. 56 4 La liste des appareils disponibles s'affiche. Choisissez l'appareil appairer dans la liste. Aprs que l'association a russi, votre tablette se connectera au dispositif. REMARQUE: Votre tablette ne prend pas en charge le profil mains-
libres. Par consquent, l'utilisation des fonctions d'appel avec certains accessoires tels que les oreillettes Bluetooth ou les dispositifs activs par connexion Bluetooth risque de ne pas tre disponible sur cet appareil. Envoi de donnes l'aide de la fonction sans fil Bluetooth 1 Ouvrez l'lment, puis touchez OU Touchez l'lment de manire prolonge, puis slectionnez Partager. OU Ouvrez l'lment, puis touchez la touche Menu 2 Touchez Bluetooth pour partager via Bluetooth.
> Partager. REMARQUE: la mthode de slection d'une option peut varier selon le type de donnes. 3 Rechercher un dispositif Bluetooth activ coupler avec votre appareil. Rception de donnes l'aide de la fonction sans fil Bluetooth 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
Paramtres 2 Touchez
> Bluetooth. pour activer la fonction Bluetooth et cochez la case en haut de l'cran pour le rendre visible aux autres dispositifs. 57 REMARQUE: Pour slectionner la dure pendant laquelle votre dispositif sera visible, touchez la touche Menu
> Expiration de visibilit. 3 Associez les dispositifs, puis touchez Accepter lorsque vous recevez une demande d'autorisation Bluetooth pour accepter le ou les fichiers. pour partager le contenu dans les applications Galerie, SmartShare Vous pouvez facilement utiliser la fonction SmartShare dans les applications Galerie, Musique, Vido, etc. Utilisation du contenu sur une varit d'appareils Vous pouvez partager le contenu de votre tablette avec l'un des appareils. Touchez Musique, Vidos et POLARIS Viewer 5. Lecture et envoi Lire Vous pouvez lire le contenu sur un tlviseur, un haut-parleur Bluetooth, etc. Transfrer Vous pouvez envoyer votre contenu vers des appareils compatibles avec Bluetooth et SmartShare Beam. SmartShare Beam Cela vous permet de transfrer rapidement du contenu via Wi-Fi Direct.
< Lire >
< Beam >
58 Utilisation du contenu sur des appareils proximit Vous pouvez bnficier du contenu disponible sur des appareils proximit
(par ex. PC, NAS, mobile) dans les applications Galerie, Musique et Vidos. Connexion de priphriques Connectez votre appareil et d'autres appareils compatibles avec DLNA sur le mme rseau Wi-Fi. Recherche d'autres appareils Touchez Appareils proximit pour afficher les appareils compatibles avec DLNA. Connectez votre tlphone l'appareil pour en voir le contenu. Connexions un ordinateur au moyen d'un cble USB Apprenez comment brancher votre appareil un ordinateur au moyen d'un cble USB dans Modes de connexionUSB. Transfert de musique, de photos et de vidos l'aide du mode de stockage de masseUSB 1 Raccordez votre tablette un ordinateur l'aide d'un cbleUSB. 2 Si vous n'avez pas install le pilote LG Android Platform Driver sur votre ordinateur, vous devez modifier les paramtres manuellement. Choisissez Paramtres systme > Connexion PC > Choisir la mthode de connexion USB, puis slectionnez Synchro mdia (MTP). 3 Vous pouvez maintenant visualiser le contenu du stockage de masse depuis lordinateur et transfrer les fichiers dsirs. 59 Synchronisation avec le lecteur multimdia Windows Media Player Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est install sur votre ordinateur. 1 Utilisez le cble USB pour connecter la tablette un ordinateur sur lequel Windows Media Player est install. 2 Slectionnez l'option Synchro mdia (MTP). Une fois la connexion tablie, une fentre contextuelle apparat l'ordinateur. 3 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers de musique. 4 Modifiez ou entrez le nom de votre appareil dans la fentre contextuelle
(s'il y a lieu). 5 Slectionnez et faites glisser les fichiers dsirs vers la liste de synchronisation. 6 Lancez la synchronisation. La configuration suivante est ncessaire la synchronisation avec Windows Media Player. lments Configuration Systme d'exploitation Version Windows Media Player Microsoft Windows XP SP2, Vista ou version ultrieure Windows Media Player version10 ou suprieure Si la version de Windows Media Player est infrieure 10, installez la version10 ou une version suprieure. 60 Rpertoire Vous pouvez ajouter des contacts dans votre tablette et les synchroniser avec les contacts de votre compte Google ou d'autres comptes qui prennent en charge la synchronisation des contacts. Recherche d'un contact 1 Depuis l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Rpertoire pour ouvrir le rpertoire. 2 Appuyez sur la case Rechercher un contact et entrez le nom du contact. Vous pouvez galement toucher une lettre sur la gauche de l'cran pour accder aux noms commenant par la lettre choisie. Ajout d'un contact 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Rpertoire 2 Touchez 3 Si vous souhaitez ajouter une photo un nouveau contact, touchez
. Slectionnez le compte souhait (le cas chant). Choisissez Prendre photo pour prendre une photo l'aide de l'appareil photo ou Choisir partir de la Galerie. Puis, recherchez une photo, et slectionnez-la. pour entrer des informations plus spcifiques sur le nom. 4 Touchez 5 Saisissez les dtails concernant votre contact. 6 Touchez Enregistrer. 61 Contacts favoris Vous pouvez classer dans les favoris les contacts avec lesquels vous communiquez frquemment. Pour ajouter un contact vos favoris:
1 l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Rpertoire pour ouvrir le rpertoire Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur un contact pour afficher ses dtails. 3 Touchez l'toile droite du nom du contact. L'toile devient or et le contact est ajout vos favoris. Pour supprimer un contact de votre liste de favoris 1 l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Rpertoire pour ouvrir le rpertoire Contacts. 2 Touchez l'onglet Favoris pour afficher vos contacts favoris. 3 Appuyez sur un contact pour afficher ses dtails. 4 Appuyez sur l'toile or la droite du nom du contact. L'toile devient grise et le contact est supprim de vos favoris. Cration d'un groupe 1 l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Rpertoire Contacts. pour ouvrir le rpertoire 2 Touchez l'onglet Groupes 3 Entrez un nom pour votre nouveau groupe.
, puis
. Appuyez sur Ajouter un membre pour ajouter des nouveaux contacts votre nouveau groupe. Appuyez sur le champ COMPTE pour modifier le(s) compte(s) dans lesquels vous souhaitez enregistrer le nouveau groupe. 62 4 Entrez un nom pour votre nouveau groupe. REMARQUE: Si vous supprimez un groupe, les contacts qui ont t associs ce groupe ne seront pas supprims. Ils seront conservs dans votre rpertoire. 63 Courriel Vous pouvez utiliser l'application Courriel pour lire les courriels provenant de services comme Gmail. L'application Courriel prend en charge les types de compte suivants: POP3, IMAP et Exchange. Votre fournisseur de services ou l'administrateur de votre systme peut vous fournir les paramtres de compte dont vous avez besoin. sur l'cran d'accueil. Lorsque vous Gestion d'un compte de messagerie Appuyez sur le bouton Courriel ouvrez l'application Courriel pour la premire fois, un assistant de configuration vous aide ajouter un compte de courriel. Aprs la configuration initiale, Courriel affiche le contenu de votre bote de rception. Si vous avez ajout plus d'un compte, vous pouvez passer d'un compte l'autre. Pour ajouter un autre compte de messagerie :
Ouvrez l'application de Courriel et touchez la touche Menu
> Rglage
>
. Pour passer d'un compte l'autre Si vous avez ajout plus d'un compte, vous pouvez facilement passer entre un l'autre. Dans un dossier de messagerie, appuyez sur le compte courant
(en haut de l'cran), puis appuyez sur le compte auquel vous souhaitez accder. Pour modifier les paramtres d'un compte de messagerie:
Ouvrez l'application Courriel, puis appuyez sur la touche Menu Rglage > Paramtres gnraux pour configurer les paramtres qui s'appliquent l'ensemble de vos comptes. Appuyez sur un compte individuel pour configurer les paramtres que pour ce compte en particulier.
>
64 Pour supprimer un compte de messagerie:
Ouvrez l'application de Courriel et touchez la touche Menu
> Rglage
> touchez la touche Menu compte que vous souhaitez supprimer > Supprimer > Oui.
> Supprimer un compte > touchez le Utilisation des dossiers de compte Ouvrez l'application de Courriel et touchez la touche Menu slectionnez Dossiers. Chaque compte contient un dossier Bote de rception, Bote d'envoi, Envoy et Brouillons. Selon les fonctionnalits prises en charge par le fournisseur de services de votre compte, vous pouvez avoir des dossiers supplmentaires. et Composition et envoi d'un courriel 1 Dans l'application de messagerie, touchez crire 2 Entrez l'adresse du destinataire du message. Lorsque vous entrez du
. texte, les adresses correspondantes de vos contacts vous sont proposes. Sparez les adresses par des points-virgules. 3 Touchez Joindre 4 Saisissez l'objet et votre message 5 Touchez Envoyer pour envoyer le message. pour joindre des fichiers, s'il y a lieu. Si vous n'tes pas connect un rseau, par exemple si vous travaillez en mode Avion, les messages que vous envoyez sont stocks dans votre dossier Bote d'envoi jusqu' ce que vous vous connectiez de nouveau un rseau. Si elle contient des messages en attente, la Bote d'envoi s'affiche l'cran Comptes. 65 Recevoir des courriels Quand un nouvel courriel arrive dans votre bote de rception, vous serez averti par un bruit ou des vibrations (en fonction de vos rglages de son ou de vibration) et une icne d'indication s'affichera sur la barre d'tat. 66 Appareil Photo Pour ouvrir l'application Appareil photo, touchez Appareil photo l'cran d'accueil. sur Utilisation du viseur Appareil frontal Permet de basculer entre l'objectif de l'appareil photo tourn vers l'arrire et celui tourn vers l'avant. Mode photo Vous permet de dfinir la manire dont la photo sera prise. Paramtres Touchez cette icne pour ouvrir le menu des paramtres. Voir Utilisation des paramtres avancs en page suivante. Mode vido Touchez pour basculer entre le mode Appareil photo et le mode Vido. Prise de photo Galerie Permet d'afficher la dernire photo que vous avez prise. Vous pouvez ainsi accder la galerie et afficher les photos sauvegardes en mode appareil photo. 67 REMARQUE: Avant de prendre des photos, assurez-vous que la lentille de l'appareil photo est propre. Utilisation des paramtres avancs l'cran du viseur, appuyez sur Aprs avoir slectionn une option, touchez la touche Prc pour accder aux options avances. Prendre des photos par commande vocale. Sert rgler la quantit de lumire de la photo. Effectue la mise au point sur un point prcis. Sert slectionner la rsolution de la photo. Si vous choisissez une haute rsolution, le fichier sera plus volumineux, ce qui signifie que vous pourrez enregistrer un moins grand nombre de photos en mmoire. Le degrISO dtermine la sensibilit du capteur de luminosit de l'appareil photo. Plus le degrISO est lev et plus l'appareil photo est sensible la lumire. Cette fonction est utile dans des conditions de faible clairage o vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash. Optimise la qualit des couleurs en fonction des conditions d'clairage. Applique des effets artistiques aux photos. Permet d'activer un dlai d'attente entre le moment o le bouton est enfonc et la prise de la photo. Cette option est pratique pour vous donner le temps de vous placer dans la scne photographier. 68 Activez cette fonction pour utiliser les services de golocalisation de votre tablette. Prenez des photos n'importe o et marquez-les de l'emplacement o elles ont t prises. Si vous chargez des photos marques sur un blogue qui prend en charge la fonction de gomarquage, vous pouvez voir sur une carte l'endroit o la photo a t prise. REMARQUE: Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque leGPS est activ. Rglez le son de l'obturateur. Rglez la touche du volume soit pour saisir ou faire un zoom. Slectionnez l'emplacement de stockage de vos photos. Choisissez entre Mmoire interne et Carte SD. Ouvre le guide d'aide pour savoir comment utiliser une fonction. Permet de rtablir tous les paramtres par dfaut de l'appareil photo. CONSEIL!
Lorsque vous quittez l'appareil photo, certains paramtres par dfaut sont rtablis, notamment l'quilibre des blancs, l'effet de couleur, le retardateur et le mode scne. Vrifiez ces paramtres avant de prendre votre prochaine photo. Le menu de rglages se superpose l'image du viseur, de sorte que lorsque vous changez des paramtres de couleur ou de qualit, vous voyez aussitt les rsultats sur l'image derrire le menu Paramtres. 69 Prise d'une photo rapide 1 Ouvrez l'application Appareil Photo. 2 Pointez l'objectif vers le sujet de la photo. 3 Une zone de mise au point s'affiche au centre de l'cran du viseur. Vous pouvez galement appuyer n'importe o sur l'cran pour faire la mise au point cet endroit. 4 La zone de mise au point devient verte pour vous indiquer que le sujet est correctement mis au point. 5 Touchez pour prendre la photo. Aprs avoir pris une photo 1 Appuyez sur l'aperu de l'image dans le coin infrieur droit de l'cran pour afficher la dernire photo que vous avez prise. 2 Appuyez sur Galerie, puis appuyez sur Toujours ou Juste une fois. Touchez pour partager vos photos avec la fonction SmartShare. Touchez pour prendre immdiatement une autre photo. Touchez pour envoyer votre photo d'autres personnes ou pour la partager sur des services de rseautage social. Touchez pour supprimer la photo. CONSEIL! Si vous avez un compte de rseau social configur sur votre tablette, vous pouvez partager vos photos avec votre communaut. 70 pour accder aux options avances. Touchez la touche Menu Configurer l'image comme Touchez cette option pour utiliser l'image comme photo du contact, Fond d'cran d'accueil ou Fond d'cran verrouill. Dplacer Touchez cette option pour dplacer la photo un autre endroit. Copier Touchez cette option pour copier la photo slectionne et l'enregistrer dans un autre album. Copier vers le presse-papier Touchez pour copier la photo et la stocker dans le presse-papier. Renommer Touchez cette option pour modifier le nom de la photo slectionne. Rotation gauche/droite Permet de faire pivoter la photo vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Rogner Rogner l'image. Dplacez votre doigt sur l'cran pour slectionner la zone tailler. Modifier Permet d'afficher et de modifier la photo. Diaporama Montre automatiquement les images du dossier courant les unes aprs les autres. Ajouter localisation Permet d'ajouter les informations sur l'emplacement. Dtails Voyez d'autres renseignements sur le contenu. Affichage des photos sauvegardes Vous pouvez accder vos photos enregistres partir du mode appareil photo. Touchez simplement l'aperu de l'image en bas de l'cran pour accder votre galerie. 1 Choisissez l'application que vous souhaitez utiliser pour visualiser et / ou diter vos photos. Appuyez sur Galerie ou photos. 71 2 Appuyez sur Toujours ou Juste une fois. Pour afficher d'autres photos, faites dfiler l'cran vers la droite ou vers la gauche. Pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrire, appuyez deux fois sur l'cran ou placez deux doigts sur l'cran et loignez-les l'un de l'autre pour faire un zoom avant ou rapprochez-les l'un de l'autre pour un zoom arrire. 72 Camra vido Pour ouvrir la camra vido, appuyez sur Appareil photo d'accueil, puis appuyez sur l'icne du mode vido passer en mode vido. sur l'cran
(dans le viseur) pour Utilisation du viseur Appareil frontal Permet de basculer entre l'objectif de l'appareil photo tourn vers l'arrire et celui tourn vers l'avant. Mode Enregistrement Vous permet de dfinir la manire dont la photo sera prise. Paramtres Touchez cette icne pour ouvrir le menu des paramtres. Voir Utilisation des paramtres avancs en page suivante. Mode Appareil photo Faites glisser cette icne vers le haut pour passer au mode appareil photo. Enregistrer Touchez pour lancer un enregistrement vido. GaleriePermet d'afficher la dernire vido que vous avez enregistre. Vous pouvez accder votre galerie et afficher les vidos sauvegardes partir du mode vido. 73 CONSEIL! Pendant que vous enregistrez une vido, placez deux doigts sur l'cran et rapprochez-les pour utiliser la fonction de zoom. REMARQUE: Assurez-vous que le micro n'est pas bloqu lorsque vous enregistrez une squence audio ou vido. Utilisation des paramtres avancs l'cran du viseur, touchez pour accder toutes les options avances. Touchez pour dfinir la taille (en pixels) de la vido que vous enregistrez. Sert rgler la quantit de lumire de la vido. Empche les tremblements pendant l'enregistrement de la vido afin d'obtenir une vido de haute qualit. Optimise la qualit des couleurs en fonction des conditions d'clairage. Choisissez l'option de couleur appliquer votre nouvelle prise de vue. Activez cette fonction pour utiliser les services de golocalisation de votre tablette. Rglez le bouton du volume soit pour le dossier ou faire un zoom. Ceci vous permet de rgler l'emplacement o vous souhaitez enregistrer vos vidos. Choisissez entre Mmoire interne et Carte SD. 74 Ouvre le guide d'aide pour savoir comment utiliser une fonction. Permet de rtablir tous les paramtres par dfaut de l'appareil photo. Enregistrement rapide d'une vido 1 Ouvrez l'application Appareil Photo et touchez l'icne Mode Vido 2 Le viseur vido apparat l'cran. 3 Tenez la tablette et pointez l'objectif vers le sujet de la vido. 4 Touchez une fois pour dmarrer l'enregistrement. 5 Une minuterie indiquant la dure de la vido apparat. 6 Appuyez sur l'cran pour arrter l'enregistrement. Aprs l'enregistrement d'une vido Appuyez sur l'aperu de l'image en bas de l'cran pour voir la dernire vido que vous avez enregistre. Touchez pour partager votre vido avec la fonction SmartShare. Appuyez sur cette option pour prendre immdiatement une autre vido. Touchez pour envoyer votre vido d'autres personnes ou pour la partager sur des services de rseautage social. Touchez cette option pour supprimer la vido. 75 Lecture des vidos enregistres Accdez vos vidos enregistres en mode camra vido en appuyant sur l'aperu d'image dans le coin infrieur droit du viseur. 1 Dans le viseur, touchez l'aperu de la photo en bas droite de l'cran. 2 Votre gallerie affichera votre dernire vido enregistre. Faites glisser vers la gauche pour faire dfiler vos autres vidos. 3 Appuyez sur l'icne de lecture sur une vido pour la lire automatiquement. REMARQUE: N'appuyez pas trop fort sur l'cran, car celui-ci est assez sensible pour dtecter une pression lgre mais ferme. Rglage du volume pendant le visionnement d'une vido Pour rgler le volume d'une vido pendant sa lecture, appuyez sur les touches de volume situes sur le ct droit de la tablette. 76 Multimdia Galerie Vous pouvez stocker des fichiers multimdias dans la mmoire interne pour pouvoir y accder facilement. Utilisez cette application pour visualiser des fichiers multimdias tels que des photos et des vidos. 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
. Galerie Vous pouvez grer et partager tous vos fichiers images et vidos l'aide de la galerie. REMARQUE:
Selon le logiciel install sur la tablette, certains formats de fichiers ne sont pas pris en charge. Selon la mthode d'encodage utilise, certains fichiers pourraient ne pas tre lus correctement. Si la taille de fichier dpasse la mmoire disponible, une erreur risque se produire l'ouverture des fichiers. Visualisation de photos Lorsque vous lancez la Galerie, tous vos dossiers disponibles s'affichent. Lorsqu'une autre application, par exemple Courriel, enregistre une photo, un dossier de tlchargement est automatiquement cr pour contenir la photo. De la mme faon, un dossier de captures d'cran est automatiquement ds que vous saisissez une capture d'cran. Pour ouvrir un dossier, touchez-le. Les photos sont affiches par date de cration dans un dossier. Slectionnez une photo afficher en mode plein cran. Faites dfiler l'cran vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour voir l'image suivante ou l'image prcdente. 77 Zoom avant et arrire Utilisez l'une des mthodes suivantes pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une image:
Appuyez deux fois n'importe quel endroit pour effectuer un zoom avant. Touchez de nouveau deux fois pour revenir en mode plein cran. Placez deux doigts n'importe o sur l'image et cartez-les pour l'agrandir Pour faire un zoom arrire, rapprochez-les ou appuyez deux fois sur l'cran. Lecture de vidos Ouvrez l'application Galerie lecture s'affiche sur les fichiers vido. Appuyez sur une image pour la slectionner. Slectionnez l'application laquelle vous souhaitez jouer
(appuyez sur l'application Photos ou l'application Vidos appuyez sur Toujours ou Juste une fois et la vido se lance. et slectionnez un album. L'icne de
), puis REMARQUE:
Durant la lecture d'une vido, faites glisser l'cran vers le haut ou le bas pour ajuster la luminosit. Durant la lecture d'une vido, faites glisser l'cran vers la gauche ou la droite pour revenir en arrire ou avancer rapidement. Supprimer des images et des vidos Utilisez l'une des mthodes suivantes:
Dans un dossier, touchez
, slectionnez les photos et les vidos que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis touchez Supprimer. Pendant le visionnement d'une photo ou d'une vido, touchez
. 78 Slection comme papier peint Lorsque vous affichez une photo, appuyez sur la touche Menu image et slectionnez Photo du contact, papier peint de l'cran d'accueil, Fond d'cran de verrouillage de l'cran ou Papier peint.
> Rglez Diaporama Vous pouvez afficher vos photos en diaporama par album ou en slectionnant toutes vos photos. Depuis l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Galerie Appuyez sur l'album avec les photos que vous souhaitez afficher, puis
. appuyez sur la touche Menu diaporama > Commencer.
> Diaporama > vrifier les paramtres du Appuyez sur la touche Menu
> Voir tous les fichiers > touche Menu
> Diaporama > vrifier les paramtres du diaporama > Commencer . Appuyez sur le touche Retour pour arrter le diaporama. Vidos Votre tablette est dote d'un lecteur vido pour vous permettre d'couter vos vidos favorites. Lecture d'une vido 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
Vidos
. 2 Slectionnez la vido regarder. 79 Appuyez sur cette touche pour mettre la lecture vido en pause. Appuyez sur cette touche pour reprendre la lecture vido. Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour avancer rapidement par incrments de 3 secondes. Appuyez une fois pour faire une avance rapide de 10 secondes. Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour revenir en arrire par incrments de 3 secondes. Appuyez une fois pour revenir en arrire de 10 secondes. Touchez cette option pour grer le volume de la vido. Touchez pour changer le format de l'cran vido. Touchez QSlide et affichez la vido dans une petite fentre. Touchez pour partager votre vido avec la fonction SmartShare. Touchez pour verrouiller l'cran vido. Pour modifier le volume pendant la lecture d'une vido, appuyez sur les touches de rglage du volume situes sur le ct droit de la tablette. Touchez une vido de manire prolonge dans la liste pour accder aux options suivantes: Partager,Supprimer, Rogner et Dtails. CONSEIL! Quand vous regardez une vido, faites glisser vers le haut et vers le bas le long du ct gauche de l'cran pour rgler la luminosit de l'cran Faites glisser vers le haut et vers le bas le long du ct droit de l'cran pour rgler le volume. 80 Musique Votre tablette est dote d'un lecteur de musique pour vous permettre d'couter votre musique favorite. Pour accder au lecteur de musique, dans
> onglet Applications > Musique l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
. Lecture d'une chanson 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Musique
.
> onglet Applications >
2 Touchez l'onglet Chansons. 3 Slectionnez la chanson que vous dsirez couter. Touchez cette option pour rechercher des fichiers en utilisant YouTube. Touchez pour partager votre musique avec la fonction SmartShare. Touchez cette option pour configurer le mode de lecture alatoire. Touchez cette option pour configurer le mode de rptition. Touchez cette option pour grer le volume de la musique. Appuyez sur cette touche pour mettre la lecture en pause. Appuyez sur cette touche pour reprendre la lecture. Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer la piste suivante de l'album ou de la liste de d'coute. Touchez cette option pour retourner au dbut de la chanson. Appuyez deux fois sur la touche pour revenir la chanson prcdente. 81 Touchez pour dfinir la chanson en cours de lecture comme une chanson favorite. Touchez cette option pour ouvrir la liste de musique actuelle. Touchez pour dfinir l'effet audio. Pour modifier le volume pendant la lecture d'un fichier musical, appuyez sur les touches de rglage du volume situes sur le ct droit de la tablette. Touchez de manire prolonge une chanson de la liste pour accder aux options suivantes: Lire, Ajouter la playlist, Partager, Supprimer, Dtails et Rechercher. REMARQUE:
Certains formats de fichiers ne sont pas pris en charge, selon le logiciel du dispositif. Si la taille de fichier dpasse la mmoire disponible, une erreur risque de se produire l'ouverture des fichiers. Le droit d'auteur associ aux fichiers musicaux peut tre protg par des traits internationaux et par des lois nationales sur le droit d'auteur. Il peut donc tre ncessaire d'obtenir une permission ou une licence pour reproduire ou copier de la musique. Les lois de certains pays interdisent la copie prive d'un objet protg par le droit d'auteur. Avant de tlcharger ou de copier un fichier, vrifiez les lois du pays concern relativement l'utilisation de cet objet. 82 Outils QPair En connectant votre tablette et votre tlphone mobile via QPair, vous pouvez synchroniser les appels entrants, les messages et les Notifications SNS entre votre tablette et votre tlphone mobile. 1 Lancez QPair et touchez Configuration initiale > Dmarrer sur votre tablette, puis procdez de la mme manire sur votre tlphone. CONSEIL! QPair n'est peut-tre pas pr-install sur le tlphone. Allez dans Google Play Store, recherchez Qpair, puis installez l'application. REMARQUE: QPair fonctionne avec les tlphones excutant Android 4.1 ou suprieur. Certaines fonctions peuvent tre limites selon le modle de votre tlphone. 2 La connexion Bluetooth s'activera automatiquement. 83 Fonctions QPair Alarme d'appel Envoie une notification la tablette lorsque le tlphone reoit un appel. La notification indique le numro de l'appelant et vous permet de refuser l'appel. Alarme de message Envoie une notification la tablette lorsque le tlphone reoit un message. Notifications SNS Affiche une notification SNS dans la barre d'tat de votre tablette lorsque votre tlphone reoit la notification. REMARQUE: Pour activer cette fonction, slectionnez d'abord Paramtres > Accessibilit > Notification SNS QPair sur votre tlphone. Cette option vous permet d'tre avis lorsque votre tlphone reoit une notification SNS. Envoyer un QuickMemo Enregistre votre QuickMemo en cours dans la galerie de la tablette, puis synchronise cette galerie avec celle de votre tlphone. tiquette d'application rcente Lorsque l'cran de l'appareil appair est dverrouill, une vignette affiche la dernire application utilise sur l'autre appareil si l'application est installe la fois sur la tablette et le tlphone. QSlide La fonction QSlide active la superposition l'cran de votre tablette pour vous permettre de voir facilement plusieurs fentres la fois. Les fentres QSlide peuvent tre ouvertes depuis la barre d'applications QSlide du panneau de notifications ou directement depuis les applications prenant en charge la fonction QSlide. 84 OU Touchez pour activer la fonction QSlide. Touchez pour quitter QSlide et revenir la fentre entire. Touchez pour rgler la transparence. Touchez pour quitter QSlide. Touchez pour ajuster la taille. REMARQUE: La fonction QSlide peut prendre en charge jusqu' deux fentres simultanment. QSlide n'est disponible que pour les applications comme Vido, Internet, Mmo, Calendrier, Calculatrice, Courriel, Gestionnaire de fichiers. 85 1 Ouvrez le panneau de notifications, puis touchez l'application souhaite dans la section QSlide Apps. OU Lorsque vous utilisez une application prenant la fonction QSlide en charge, touchez petite fentre prsente sur votre cran. La fonction s'affiche en continu sous la forme d'une 2 Faites glisser pour ajuster le niveau de transparence. Et faites glisser la barre de titre QSlide pour la dplacer un autre endroit de l'cran. QuickMemo La fonction Quick Memo vous permet de crer des mmos et d'effectuer des captures d'cran. Capturez des crans, dessinez dessus et partagez-les avec votre famille ou vos amis. Cration d'un QuickMemo 1 Accdez la fonction Quick Memo, faites glisser la barre d'tat vers le bas, puis touchez
. OU Appuyez simultanment sur les deux touches de volume pendant une seconde. 86 2 Slectionnez l'option de menu dsire entre Type de crayon, Couleur et Gomme effacer. Puis, crez un mmo. 3 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer le mmo. Vous pouvez quitter la fonction Mmo rapide tout moment en touchant la touche Retour
. REMARQUE: Lorsque vous naviguez dans la fonction Quick Memo, servez-vous du bout de vos doigts. N'utilisez pas vos ongles. Utilisation des options QuickMemo Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la barre d'outils de Quick Memo en haut de l'cran. Touchez pour garder le mmo actuel l'cran tout en utilisant votre tablette. Indique si l'arrire-plan doit tre utilis ou non. Vous permet d'annuler et de rpter les actions prcdentes. Permet de slectionner le type de stylo et la couleur. 87 Sert effacer le mmo que vous avez cr. Touchez pour envoyer votre mmo d'autres personnes ou pour la partager sur des services de rseautage social. Permet d'enregistrer le mmo dans le Carnet ou dans la Galerie. Affichage du Quick Memo enregistr Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications slectionnez l'album Quick Memo.
> Galerie
, puis QuickRemote QuickRemote transforme votre tablette en tlcommande universelle pour votre tlviseur, votre lecteur de DVD ou votre lecteur de Blu-ray. REMARQUE: QuickRemote peut ne pas tre disponible selon les appareils et les rgions. Pour ouvrir l'application QuickRemote et configurer vos tlcommandes QuickRemote 1 Depuis l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Applications
> onglet Applications > QuickRemote la configuration initiale de votre QuickRemote partir du panneau de Notifications. Faites glisser la barre d'tat vers le bas, appuyez sur l'icne QuickRemote
. Vous pouvez galement effectuer
. 2 Touchez pour slectionner un type de pice, puis touchez pour ajouter le dispositif. 88 3 Slectionnez le type et la marque de l'appareil, puis suivez les instructions l'cran pour configurer l'appareil. REMARQUE: La fonction QuickRemote fonctionne de la mme manire qu'une tlcommande infrarouge (IR) ordinaire dans votre rgion ou votre pays. Faites attention de ne pas couvrir le capteur infrarouge situ en haut de votre tablette lorsque vous utilisez la fonction QuickRemote. Cette fonction peut ne pas tre prise en charge selon le modle, le fabricant ou l'entreprise de service. Utilisation de QuickRemote 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications pour ouvrir une barre QuickRemote comportant toutes les tlcommandes que vous avez configures.
> QuickRemote 2 Slectionnez la tlcommande de votre choix en touchant son type/nom en haut de la barre QuickRemote. 3 Touchez les boutons sur la tlcommande affiche. 89 REMARQUE: Lorsque vous ajoutez une tlcommande de tlviseur, QuickRemote peut utiliser le bouton ENTRE pour configurer la tlcommande approprie. Lors de la configuration du bouton ENTRE, la source d'entre du tlviseur risque d'tre modifie. Pour rinitialiser la source d'entre de votre tlviseur, touchez plusieurs fois le bouton ENTRE de la tlcommande QuickRemote (en fonction du nombre d'appareils connects au tlviseur). Options de QuickRemote Pour accder au menu d'options de QuickRemote, touchez la touche Menu souhaite.
(sur la barre de touches tactiles avant) pour slectionner l'option REMARQUE: Lorsque de la musique est lue en arrire-plan, le fait d'appuyer sur une touche de la tlcommande QuickRemote met le son en sourdine pendant une seconde. QuickTranslator Il suffit de pointer l'appareil photo de votre tablette sur la phrase en langue trangre que vous souhaitez comprendre. Vous pouvez obtenir des traductions partout et en tout temps. Vous pouvez acheter des dictionnaires supplmentaires pour traduction hors ligne dans la boutique Google Play. 90 Langue source. Langue de destination. Passe en mode vocal. Appuyez sur le bouton de langue, puis parlez. Traduction d'un mot crit. Traduction d'une phrase crite. Traduction d'un paragraphe. Accde aux paramtres QuickTranslator. Vous pouvez rgler les langues sources et cibles ici. 1 Touchez 2 Saisissez le format de traduction. Choisissez soit
> onglet Applications > QuickTranslator
.
, Mot, Ligne ou Bloquer. 3 Appuyez sur l'icne Paramtres 4 Tenez la tablette pendant quelques secondes vers le sujet que vous et rglez les langues source et cible. souhaitez traduire. REMARQUE: Un seul dictionnaire est fourni gratuitement. Vous pouvez acheter des dictionnaires additionnels. Veuillez slectionner dans la liste ci-dessous le dictionnaire que vous dsirez installer comme dictionnaire gratuit. REMARQUE: La reconnaissance des termes traduire pourrait varier selon la taille de la police, le type de police, la couleur, la luminosit ou l'angle de saisie des lettres. 91 Voice Mate Vous pouvez demander au Voice Mate d'activer certaines fonctions de la tablette l'aide de la voix, comme rgler des sonneries ou faire une recherche sur le Web. Lorsque vous utilisez le Voice mate pour la premire fois, il affiche des informations d'aide pour vous aider apprendre comment utiliser cette fonction. Ouverture de l'application Voice mate Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Utilisation du Voice mate 1 Ouvrez l'application Voice Mate. 2 Touchez l'icne Parler
(en bas de l'cran) pour l'activer. Donnez la
> Voice Mate
. commande que vous voulez qu'il excute votre place. Si vous dites Rveille-moi 6h00, le Voice mate rglera l'heure de l'alarme sur cette heure. REMARQUE: Accdez aux paramtres du Voice mate pour cocher la case Ignorer la confirmation de manire ce que les noms (ou numros) correspondant exactement la recherche soient excuts sans confirmation. Icnes du Voice Mate Les icnes suivantes du Voice mate sont affiches en bas de l'cran:
Touchez pour afficher la fentre QSlide du Voice mate sur l'cran d'accueil. Touchez pour dire une commande vocale excuter. Touchez pour taper une commande excuter. 92 Menu d'options du Voice mate Touchez la touche Menu slectionnez Paramtres ou Aide. pour accder au menu d'options et REMARQUE:
Si la langue slectionne pour le Voice mate n'est pas la mme que la langue par dfaut de votre tablette, il se peut que certaines commandes, comme le lancement d'applications, ne fonctionnent pas. Lorsque vous saisissez du texte, vous ne pouvez utiliser que des lettres et des chiffres. Le Voice mate vous comprend mieux lorsque vous parlez lentement. Vous pouvez voir des exemples de diverses commandes en faisant glisser l'cran principal du Voice mate vers la gauche. Alarme Rglage de l'alarme 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Alarme/Horloge
>
.
> onglet Applications >
2 Rglez l'heure d'alarme souhaite. 3 Rglez les options Rpter, Frquence de rptition, Vibration, Son alarme, Volume, Auto dmarreur d'applications, Verrouiller par puzzle et Mmo. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. 93 REMARQUE: Pour modifier les paramtres d'une alarme l'cran de la liste des alarmes, appuyez sur la touche Menu et slectionnez Paramtres. Calculatrice Utilisation de la calculatrice 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Calculatrice
.
> onglet Applications >
2 Appuyez sur les touches de chiffres pour entrer les nombres voulus. 3 Pour des calculs simples, touchez la fonction que vous souhaitez raliser
(
,
, ou
) suivi par
. REMARQUE:
Pour des calculs plus complexes, touchez la touche Menu
, slectionnez la Calculatrice scientifique, puis choisissez la fonction souhaite. Pour afficher l'historique de la calculatrice, touchez la touche Menu
> Historique des calculs. Calendrier Ajout d'un vnement votre calendrier 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Calendrier
.
> onglet Applications >
2 Touchez le bouton en haut gauche pour modifier la vue du calendrier
(Jour, Semaine, Mois, Anne, Planification). 94 3 Touchez la date laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter un vnement, puis touchez
. 4 Touchez le champ Nom de l'vnement, puis saisissez le nom de l'vnement. 5 Touchez le champ Emplacement, puis saisissez le lieu. Vrifiez la date et entrez l'heure laquelle l'vnement doit commencer et finir. 6 Pour ajouter une note votre vnement, touchez le champ Description, puis saisissez les dtails. 7 Si vous souhaitez recevoir une alarme rpte, activez l'option RPTER puis rglez l'option RAPPELS au besoin. 8 Appuyez sur Enreg. pour sauvegarder l'vnement dans votre agenda. REMARQUE: Appuyez et maintenez un point sur le calendrier pour enregistrer rapidement un vnement de calendrier cette date. Il suffit d'entrer le nom et l'heure de l'vnement, puis d'appuyer sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez appuyez sur Dtails et entrer plus d'informations, ou mettre jour l'vnement avec plus de dtails plus tard. Tches Avec l'application des tches, vous pouvez synchronisez des tches avec un compte MS Exchange. Vous pouvez crer et grer vos tches l'aide de votre tablette ou depuis MS Outlook ou MS Office Outlook Web Access. 1 Depuis l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Applications > Tches 2 Appuyez sur l'icne Ajouter tche
(dans le coin suprieur droit de
. l'cran). 95 3 Saisissez le Sujet, la date d'chance, la description, la rptition, etle rappel, selon vos souhaits. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer (Au bas de l'cran). Gest. fichs L'application Gest. fichs vous permet de grer les fichiers de vos supports de stockage internes/externes. Ouverture du Gestionnaire de fichiers Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> Gest. fichs
. Dictaphone Vous pouvez utiliser l'enregistreur vocal (dictaphone) pour crer des mmos vocaux ou tout autre fichier audio. Enregistrement d'un son ou de la voix 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
Dictaphone
. 2 Touchez 3 Touchez 4 Touchez pour commencer l'enregistrement. pour arrter l'enregistrement. pour couter l'enregistrement. pour accder la liste de vos REMARQUE: Touchez enregistrements. Vous pouvez couter les enregistrements que vous avez sauvegards. L'heure d'enregistrement disponible peut diffrer de l'heure relle. 96 Envoi d'un enregistrement vocal 1 Une fois l'enregistrement termin, vous pouvez envoyer le clip audio en touchant
. 2 Choisissez l'une des mthodes de partage disponibles. Gest. de tches Vous pouvez grer vos applications l'aide du gestionnaire de tches. Cette application vous permet de vrifier facilement le nombre d'applications ouvertes et de fermer certaines d'entre elles. Options du gestionnaire de tches Touchez arrt pour arrter des applications individuelles. Touchez Arrter tout pour arrter toutes les applications en cours. Touchez la touche Menu pour accder aux options Aide, Trier par et Paramtres. POLARIS Office 5 POLARIS Office 5 est une suite bureautique mobile professionnelle qui permet aux utilisateurs d'afficher divers types de documents Office (y compris des fichiers Word, Excel et PowerPoint), tout moment et en tout lieu, l'aide de leurs appareils mobiles. Pour crer un document 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
POLARIS Office 5
. 2 Enregistrez votre adresse de courriel sur la page d'enregistrement. 97 REMARQUE: Vous pouvez toucher Ignorer pour ignorer l'tape d'enregistrement. 3 Touchez 4 Touchez un type de document dans la liste droulante, puis choisissez un pour commencer un nouveau document. modle. 5 Saisissez du contenu dans le document l'aide des outils situs en haut de l'cran et du clavier virtuel. 6 Lorsque vous avez termin de travailler sur le document, touchez
(dans le coin suprieur gauche de l'cran), puis touchez Enregistrer et saisissez le nom du document. Pour afficher et modifier un document sur votre appareil Vous pouvez maintenant facilement afficher et modifier une vaste palette de types de fichiers, y compris des documents Microsoft Office et Adobe PDF, directement sur vos appareils mobiles. Touchez un onglet de document Office en haut de l'cran pour rechercher des documents sur votre tablette. Touchez le document que vous souhaitez afficher ou modifier. Lorsque vous affichez des documents l'aide de POLARIS Office 5, les objets et la mise en page restent identiques ceux des documents originaux. Pour le modifier, touchez
. 98 Google+
Utilisez Google+ pour rester connect avec les gens via le service de rseau social de Google. Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Google+
> onglet Applications >
. REMARQUE: Selon la rgion ou le fournisseur de services, il est possible que cette application ne soit pas disponible. Recherche vocale L'application de recherche vocale vous permet de rechercher des pages Web en utilisant votre voix au lieu de taper. 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
Recherche vocale
. 2 Lorsque le message Parlez maintenant s'affiche, dites un mot ou une expression. Choisissez l'un des mots cls qui s'affichent comme suggestions. REMARQUE: Selon la rgion ou le fournisseur de services, il est possible que cette application ne soit pas disponible. Tlchargements Utilisez l'application Tlchargement pour afficher les fichiers qui ont t tlchargs. Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Tlchargements
> onglet Applications >
. 99 BOX L'application BOX vous facilite l'accs et la modification de vos fichiers, du partage du contenu et la connexion avec vos fichiers depuis n'importe o sur n'importe quel appareil. Pour ouvrir l'application BOX Depuis l'cran d'accueil, appuyez sur Applications
> onglet Applications > BOX
. 100 Le Web Internet Utilisez cette application pour naviguer sur l'internet. Le navigateur vous donne accs un monde palpitant de jeux, de musique, de nouvelles, de sports, de divertissements et plus encore, directement sur votre tablette, o que vous soyez et quels que soient vos centres d'intrt. Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Internet
> onglet Applications >
. Touchez pour reculer d'une page. Touchez cette option pour aller la page suivante, celle laquelle vous vous tes connect aprs la page actuelle. Il s'agit de l'oppos de ce qui se produit lorsque vous touchez la touche Retour qui vous ramne la page prcdente. Touchez cette option pour aller la page d'accueil.
, Touchez pour ajouter un nouvel onglet. Touchez pour accder aux signets. Touchez pour activer QSlide. Touchez pour fermer l'onglet actuel. Touchez pour actualiser ou arrter la page en cours. Ouverture d'une page Pour ouvrir une nouvelle page, touchez Pour aller sur une autre page Web, touchez la page pour l'afficher. 101 Pour effectuer une recherche vocale sur le Web Touchez le champ d'adresse Web, touchez slectionnez l'un des mots-cls suggrs qui apparaissent.
, dites un mot-cl, puis REMARQUE: Selon la rgion ou le fournisseur de services, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. dans la barre d'outils dans la barre d'outils du navigateur, puis slectionnez l'onglet Favoris Pour ouvrir une page Web mise en favori, touchez du navigateur, puis slectionnez-en une. Historique Touchez Historique pour ouvrir une page Web contenant la liste des pages Web rcemment visites. Pour effacer l'historique, touchez la touche Menu Effacer tout l'historique. Utilisation de QSlide Utilisez cette fonction pour accder Internet sans avoir fermer l'application en cours. Lorsque vous consultez du contenu dans le navigateur, touchez pouvez alors consulter d'autres informations sur votre tablette. Pour afficher le navigateur en plein cran, touchez
. Vous
.
>
Chrome Utilisez Chrome pour rechercher de l'information et naviguer sur le Web. Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
Chrome
. 102 REMARQUE: Selon la rgion ou le fournisseur de services, il est possible que cette application ne soit pas disponible. Visualisation de pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d'adresse (en haut de l'cran), saisissez une adresse Web ou des critres de recherche, et appuyez sur Ouverture d'une page Pour aller sur une nouvelle page, touchez Pour aller sur une autre page Web, touchez la page de votre choix pour la sur le clavier. slectionner. Pour effectuer une recherche vocale sur le Web Touchez le champ d'adresse, appuyez sur slectionnez l'une des suggestions qui s'affichent.
, dites un mot cl, puis REMARQUE: Selon la rgion ou le fournisseur de services, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. Synchronisation avec d'autres appareils La synchronisation ouvre des onglets et des signets dans Chrome sur un autre appareil lorsque vous vous connectez au mme compte Google. Pour afficher les onglets ouverts sur d'autres appareils, touchez la touche Menu Google sur tous les appareils. Slectionnez une page Web ouvrir.
> Autres appareils. Vous devez tre connect au mme compte 103 Ajouter et afficher des signets Pour ajouter des signets, touchez Pour ouvrir une page Web mise en favori, touchez la touche Menu Favoris. Menu Options de Chrome Nouvel onglet Appuyez sur cette option pour crer un nouvel onglet sur
>
. la page Web. Nouvel onglet de navigation prive Appuyez sur cette option pour crer un nouvel onglet de navigation prive. Favoris Affiche vos pages Web en favoris. Autres appareils Affiche vos pages Web ouvertes sur d'autres appareils. Historique Affiche vos donnes de navigation (de pages Web que vous avez visits). Partager ... Permet de partager une URL. Imprimer ... Appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer la photo. Choisissez de trouver automatiquement une imprimante sur votre rseau, ou saisissez manuellement celle utiliser.. Rechercher sur la page Permet de rechercher du texte dans la page Web en cours Demander bureau Cochez la case pour accder au bureau lorsque vous affichez des pages Web sur votre tablette. Paramtres Vous permet de modifier les paramtres ddis l'application Chrome. Aide Affiche des informations sur l'utilisation de l'application Chrome sur votre tablette. 104 Paramtres Accs au menu Paramtres 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications Paramtres
.
> onglet Applications >
OU Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez la touche Menu systme.
> Paramtres 2 Slectionnez une catgorie de paramtres et une option. RSEAUX SANS FILS Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Vous permet d'activer la fonction Wi-Fi afin de pouvoir vous connecter aux rseaux Wi-Fi disponibles. La liste de tous les rseaux Wi-Fi qui ont t consultes. Appuyez sur l'un d'eux pour vous y connecter. REMARQUE: Appuyez sur Rechercher au bas de l'cran pour rechercher les rseaux Wi-Fi accessibles. dans le menu Wi-Fi pour accder au Appuyez sur la touche Menu menu des Options Wi-Fi :
Bouton Push WPS Informations pour se connecter un rseau Wi-Fi scuris avec un bouton WPS. Entre WPS par PIN Informations pour se connecter un rseau Wi-Fi scuris avec un code PIN WPS. 105 Ajouter un rseau Vous permet de saisir manuellement un nouveau rseau Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi Direct Vous permet de vous connecter directement des priphriques Wi-Fi sans point d'accs. Avance Wi-Fi Permet d'accder aux paramtres avancs Wi-Fi suivants. Tutoriel interactif Affiche quelques tutoriels utiles pour la fonction Wi-Fi. CONSEIL! Obtention de l'adresseMAC Pour configurer une connexion sur certains rseaux sans fil utilisant des filtres d'adressesMAC, vous devez prciser l'adresseMAC de votre tablette dans la configuration du routeur. Vous pouvez obtenir l'adresse MAC de la tablette en utilisant les options suivantes: Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> Paramtres
> Wi-Fi > touche Menu
> Avanc Wi-Fi > Adresse MAC. dans le menu Bluetooth pour accder au Bluetooth Activez ou dsactivez la fonction sans fil Bluetooth pour pouvoir l'utiliser. ACTIV vous permet de relier et connecter d'autres priphriques Bluetooth. Appuyez sur la touche Menu menu des Options Bluetooth. Modifier le nom de la tablette Change le nom de votre tablette pour une identification facile quand vous l'appairez et la connectez. Saisissez le nouveau nom de la tablette, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. Dure de visibilit Dfinit la dure pendant laquelle d'autres priphriques Bluetooth peuvent voir votre tablette pour l'appairage et la connexion.. Choisissez une des options suivante 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 1 heure, et Ne jamais dsactiver. 106 Afficher les fichiers reus Affiche une liste de vos fichiers reus par Bluetooth. Tutoriel interactif - Affiche quelques tutoriels utiles sur les fonctions Bluetooth. Utilisation des donnes Affiche l'utilisation des donnes. Plus... Vous permet de partager des dossiers avec d'autres appareils via une connexion sans fil. Mode Avion Cochez la case Mode Avion pour l'activer. L'activation du mode Avion dsactive toutes les connexions sans fil. Stockage sans fil Vous pouvez grer les fichiers de votre tablette depuis l'ordinateur ou copier des fichiers sur votre tablette depuis l'ordinateur sans connexion USB. Assurez-vous que la tablette et l'ordinateur sont bien connects sur le mme rseau. Puis, saisissez les adresses Web affiches sur votre tablette dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur de votre ordinateur. Miracast Reproduire sans fil l'cran et le son de votre tablette sur la cl lectronique Miracast ou sur un tlviseur. SmartShare Beam Activez cette option pour recevoir du contenu multimdia par l'intermdiaire de SmartShare Beam sur votre tlphone ou tablette LG. Serveur de mdias Permet de partager des contenus multimdia avec les appareils proximit via DLNA. VPN Affiche la liste des rseaux privs virtuels(VPN) que vous avez dj configurs. Vous pouvez ajouter diffrents types de rseaux privs virtuels. 107 REMARQUE: vous devez configurer un code PIN ou un mot de passe pour l'cran de verrouillage avant de pouvoir utiliser le stockage des identifiants. APPAREIL Son Profils sonores Vous pouvez choisir Son, Vibreur seul ou Silencieux. Volumes Vous pouvez rgler le volume du son des notifications, de la rtroaction tactile et du systme, de la musique, des vidos, des jeux et autres applications multimdias. Son de notification Vous permet de configurer votre sonnerie de notification par dfaut. Toucher les sons Permet de configurer votre tablette pour qu'elle mette un son quand vous touchez un bouton, une icne ou d'autres lments tactiles de l'cran. Son verrouillage cran Permet de configurer la tablette pour qu'elle mette un son quand vous verrouillez ou dverrouillez l'cran. Vibre au toucher Permet de configurer la tablette de faon ce qu'elle vibre lorsque l'cran tactile est touch. cran cran d'accueil Thme Permet de configurer un fond d'cran pour votre appareil. Fond d'cran Permet de configurer le papier peint utiliser sur votre cran d'accueil. Effet d'cran Permet de slectionner l'effet utiliser lorsque vous 108 passez d'un cran l'autre. Autoriser bouclage de l'cran d'acceuil Cochez pour configurer les crans d'accueil dfiler continuellement, liminant ainsi la ncessit de revenir vers l'arrire une fois arriv la fin. Accueil sauvegarde & restauration Vous permet de sauvegarder et de restaurer les applications, les widgets, les configurations et les thmes. Do you know? Activez cette option pour afficher la page d'aide Do you know? qui affiche un cran d'accueil supplmentaire. Aide Affiche des informations concernant le fonctionnement de l'cran d'accueil. Verrouiller l'cran cran de vrouillage Permet de configurer un type de verrouillage de l'cran pour protger votre tablette. Cette option ouvre une srie d'crans pour vous guider dans le processus de dessin d'un schma de dverrouillage de l'cran. Si le type de verrouillage avec schma est activ, vous serez invit saisir votre schma de dverrouillage lorsque vous allumerez votre tablette ou que vous dverrouillerez l'cran. Effet d'cran Permet de configurer les options d'effets d'cran. Animation mto Cochez pour afficher une animation climatique pour votre lieu actuel ou la ville principale dfinie dans Mto sur la base d'une mise jour automatique des donnes. Fond d'cran Permet de configurer le fond d'cran verrouill. Slectionnez-le dans la Galerie ou dans la Papiers Peints. Raccourcis Pour modifier les raccourcis de l'cran lorsque vous utilisez la mthode de dverrouillage par glissement. 109 Infos propritaire Cochez pour rgler le nom du propritaire de la tablette afficher sur l'cran verrouill. Touchez pour entrer le texte afficher titre de Renseignements sur le propritaire. Mode portrait uniquement Cochez pour toujours afficher l'cran de verrouillage en vue portrait. Minuterie du verrouillage Permet de dfinir le dlai avant que le verrouillage automatique de l'cran s'active une fois l'cran mis en veille. Verrouillage instantan du bouton d'alimentation Cochez pour verrouiller instantanment l'cran lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton de mise en marche/verrouillage. Ce rglage annule le Temporisateur du verrouillage de scurit. Luminosit Permet de rgler la luminosit de l'cran. Mise en veille de l'cran Permet de rgler le dlai de mise en veille de l'cran. Allumez l'cran Cochez pour activer la fonction KnockON qui permet d'activer et de dsactiver l'cran. Appuyez deux fois rapidement sur le centre de l'cran pour l'allumer. Cliquez deux fois sur la barre d'tat, une zone vide de l'cran d'accueil ou l'cran de verrouillage pour teindre l'cran. Pour de meilleurs rsultats, ne dplacez pas la tablette pendant que vous utilisez la fonction KnockON. Effet cran teint Permet de configurer les options d'effets lorsque l'cran est dsactiv. Rotation auto cran Permet de changer automatiquement d'orientation lorsque vous faites pivoter la tablette. cran de veille interactif Appuyez sur le commutateur pour mettre le mode veille en marche ou le dsactiver. L'option Activ permet d'afficher l'conomiseur d'cran slectionn lorsque la tablette est en mode veille sur une station d'accueil et/ou en train de se recharger. Choisissez parmi Horloge, Couleurs, Cadre ou Table de photo. 110 REMARQUE: La charge peut tre plus lente lorsque l'cran de veille est activ. Type de police Permet de modifier le type de police d'affichage. Taille de police Permet de modifier la taille de la police d'affichage. cran intelligent Permet de maintenir l'cran allum lorsque l'appareil dtecte que vos yeux regardent l'cran. Vido intelligente Cochez cette case pour mettre la vido en pause lorsque l'appareil dtecte que vos yeux ne regardent pas l'cran. Boutons tactiles avant Rgler les touches de face affiches dans le bas de tous les crans. Dterminez celles qui sont affiches, leur position sur la barre et leur apparence. Slectionnez les touches et leur ordre, le thme et le fonds d'cran. Calibration des capteurs de mouvement Permet d'amliorer la prcision du mouvement de pivotement et la vitesse du capteur. Stockage STOCKAGE INTERNE Affiche la quantit totale d'espace dans la mmoire de l'appareil et indique les types de donnes qui utilisent l'espace. CARTE SD Affiche la quantit totale de mmoire sur la carte microSD. Espace total Monter/Dsactiver la carte SD Activez et dsactivez la carte microSD de votre tablette de manire pouvoir accder aux donnes qu'elle contient, formater la carte ou la retirer de manire scuritaire. Ce rglage est tamis s'il n'y a aucune carte microSD installe, si vous l'avez dj dsinstalle ou que vous avez install une carte microSD sur votre ordinateur. Effacer la carte SD Supprime de faon permanente tout ce qui se trouve sur la carte microSD et la prpare tre utilise avec votre tablette. 111 Batterie INFORMATIONS SUR LA BATTERIE Consultez la manire dont la puissance de la batterie est utilise pour les activits de l'appareil. Le niveau de la batterie s'affiche en pourcentage. L'autonomie restante s'affiche galement. Pourcentage de la batterie sur la barre d'tat Affiche le pourcentage de charge de la batterie dans la barre d'tat. conomie d'nergie Gre les lments d'conomie d'nergie de la batterie. Touchez le commutateur conomie d'nergie pour accder aux options suivantes. pour activer cette fonction. Touchez Synchronisation auto: Dsactive la synchronisation automatique. Wi-Fi: Dsactive la fonction Wi-Fi lorsque les donnes ne sont pas utilises. Bluetooth: Dsactive la liaison Bluetooth lorsque vous n'tes pas connect. Vibre au toucher: Dsactive la rtroaction de touche. Luminosit: Permet de rgler la luminosit. Mise en veille de l'cran: Permet de rgler le dlai de mise en veille de l'cran. Aide Touchez pour afficher des conseils sur la fonction d'conomie d'nergie. Applications Affiche la liste des applications telles que les applications en cours ou tlcharges. Faites glisser vers la gauche et la droite pour afficher l'un des trois onglets en haut de l'cran pour afficher des informations dtailles TLCHARGEMENT, EN COURS, Et TOUTES les applications. 112 Appuyez sur une entre pour afficher plus d'informations, appuyez Forcer l'arrt, puis OK pour la faire s'arrter. Glissez ct Vous pouvez utiliser un glissement trois doigts pour enregistrer les applications en cours sur la gauche ou les faire rapparatre sur l'cran. PERSONNEL Comptes et synchro Permet aux applications de synchroniser des donnes en arrire-plan, que vous soyez ou non en train de les utiliser activement. En dcochant cette option, vous pouvez prserver la charge de la batterie et rduire (sans l'arrter compltement) l'utilisation des donnes. Cloud Appuyez sur Ajouter un compte pour utiliser la fonction du cloud. Util Cochez pour rgler le nom du propritaire de la tablette l'cran verrouill. Appuyez sur pour entrer le texte afficher titre de Renseignements sur le propritaire. Ajouter un utilisateur Vous permet d'ajouter un nouveau compte sur la tablette et d'utiliser la fonction Multi-utilisateur. 113 Accs la localisation Mode High Haute prcision Utilisez le GPS, le Wi-Fi, les rseaux mobiles et pour estimer votre localisation. conomiser la batterie Utilisez le GPS, le Wi-Fi, les rseaux mobiles et pour estimer votre localisation. Capteurs de l'appareil uniquement Utilisez le GPS pour dfinir votre localisation. DEMANDES RCENTES DE LOCALISATION Affiche les applications qui ont rcemment demand vos informations de localisation. SERVICES DE LOCALISATION Rapports d'emplacement Google Vous permet d'afficher vos paramtres de localisation Google. Scurit Crypter la tablette Vous permet de crypter les donnes contenues sur votre tablette des fins de scurit. Il vous sera demand de saisir un code PIN ou un mot de passe pour dcrypter votre tablette chaque fois que vous l'allumerez. Cryptage du stockage de carte SD Vous permet de crypter les donnes contenues sur la carte MicroSD des fins de scurit. Mot de passe visible Permet d'afficher le dernier caractre du mot de passe cach en cours de frappe. Administrateurs de priphrique Permet d'afficher ou de dsactiver les administrateurs de la tablette. 114 Sources inconnues Paramtre par dfaut pour l'installation d'applications ne provenant pas de Play Store. Vrifier les applications Empche ou signale une installation d'applications pouvant tre nuisibles. Type de stockage Affiche le type de stockage. Certificats de confiance Permet d'afficher les certificats CA de confiance. Installer depuis la mmoire Choisissez cette option pour installer des certificats crypts. Effacer les certificats Supprime tous les certificats. Langue et entre Utilisez les paramtres Langue et Entre pour slectionner la langue du texte affich sur votre tablette et configurer le clavier virtuel, y compris les mots que vous avez ajouts dans son dictionnaire. Sauvegarder & rinitialiser Sauvegarder mes donnes Configur pour sauvegarder vos paramtres et vos donnes d'application sur le serveur de Google. Compte de sauvegarde Permet de dfinir le compte sur lequel vous souhaitez sauvegarder vos donnes. Restaurer automatiquement Configur pour restaurer vos paramtres et vos donnes d'application en cas de rinstallation des applications sur votre tablette. Service de sauvegarde LG Sauvegarde toute l'information sur l'appareil et la restaure en cas de perte de donnes ou de remplacement. 115 Rinit. valeurs d'usine Permet de rinitialiser vos paramtres aux valeurs par dfaut rgls en usine et de supprimer toutes vos donnes. Si vous rinitialisez la tablette de cette manire, vous tes invit saisir de nouveau les mmes informations que si vous dmarriez Android pour la premire fois. SYSTME Date et heure Utilisez le paramtre Date et heure pour rgler l'affichage de la date. Vous pouvez galement utiliser ces paramtres pour dfinir votre propre heure et votre propre fuseau horaire plutt que d'avoir recours au rseau mobile pour obtenir l'heure. Accessibilit Utilisez les paramtres d'accessibilit pour configurer les plug-ins d'accessibilit que vous avez installs sur votre tablette. REMARQUE: D'autres modules complmentaires sont ncessaires pour que cette option soit accessible. Talk back Vous permet de configurer la fonction Rtroaction qui aide les gens malvoyants en leur fournissant des instructions verbales. Touchez le commutateur Talk back en haut droite de l'cran pour l'activer. Touchez Paramtres en bas de l'cran pour rgler les paramtres de l'application Rtroaction. Grands caractres Cochez cette case pour augmenter la taille du texte. Inverser couleurs Cochez cette case pour inverser les couleurs. 116 pour activer cette fonction. Rglage de la couleur Permet d'afficher l'cran avec plus de contraste de couleur. Appuyez sur le bouton Appuyez sur le zoom Vous permet de faire un zoom avant ou arrire en touchant trois fois l'cran. Nuances d'cran Permet de dfinir une ombre noire sur l'cran. Audio mono Cochez cette case pour permet au son transmis au casque d'coute d'tre achemine par les canaux de gauche et de droite. Sous-titres Permet de personnaliser les paramtres de sous-titrage pour les personnes ayant une dficience auditive. Appuyez sur le bouton pour activer cette fonction. Temps de raction Rgle le temps de contact et de raction. Slectionnez parmi les options Court, Moyen, et Long. Touche sensible Touchez universelle peut remplacer toutes les touches de l'appareil. Rotation auto cran Cochez cette case pour permettre l'appareil de faire pivoter l'cran en fonction de l'orientation de l'appareil (portrait ou paysage). Lire Lire les mots de passe Cochez pour avoir une confirmation verbale lors de la saisie des mots de passe. Raccourci des paramtres d'accessibilit Dfinit un accs rapide et facile aux fonctions slectionnes lorsque vous appuyez trois reprises touche Accueil. Sortie Texte--parole La sortie texte--parole permet une lecture audible du texte, par exemple, le contenu des messages texte. Connexion PC Choisir la mthode de connexion USB Dfinissez le mode souhait:
Chargez la batterie de la tablette, Synchro mdia (MTP), Logiciel LG ou Envoyer une photo (PTP). pour activer ou dsactiver. La touche 117 Demander lors de la connexion Demander le mode de connexion USB en cas de liaison un ordinateur. Aide Affiche de l'aide relative la connexion USB. PC Suite Cochez cette case pour utiliser LG PC Suite avec votre connexion Wi-Fi. Notez que le rseau Wi-Fi doit tre configur pour LG PC Suite par liaison Wi-Fi. Aide Aide du logiciel LG. Accessoires Quick Cover Activez le couvercle rapide pour activer ou dsactiver automatiquement la tablette. USB Stockage USB Plug & Pop Permet de dfinir la fonction Plug &
Pop du stockage USB. Cochez cette option du panneau des applications pour afficher automatiquement le panneau des applications lorsque vous connectez un cble USB OTG (On-the-Go). Appuyez sur Modifier panneau app pour modifier les applications que vous voulez rendre disponibles. Prise d'couteur Plug & Pop Dfinit la fonction Plug & Pop des couteurs. Cochez cette option du panneau des applications pour afficher automatiquement le panneau des applications lorsque vous branchez des couteurs. Touchez Modifier le panneau des applications pour modifier les applications que vous souhaitez rendre disponibles. Station Plug & Pop Dfinit la fonction Plug & Pop de la station d'accueil. Cochez cette option du panneau des applications pour afficher automatiquement le panneau des applications lorsque vous connectez une station d'accueil. Appuyez sur Modifier panneau app pour modifier les applications que vous voulez rendre disponibles. 118 Impression Vous permet d'imprimer le contenu de certains crans (telles que les pages Web affiches sous Chrome) sur une imprimante connecte au mme rseau Wi-Fi que votre appareil Android. propos de la tablette Ce menu vous permet de grer vos mises jour logicielles et de lire les diffrents renseignements propos de votre tablette. Nom de la tablette Vous permet de donner un nom votre tablette. Centre de mise jour Permet de vrifier les mises jour d'applications et de logiciels. Batterie Vous permet d'afficher l'tat de la batterie, le niveau de charge de la batterie et les informations concernant l'utilisation de la batterie. Informations sur le matriel - Vous permet d'afficher le numro de modle, l'adresse IP, la dure, la CSN, l'adresse MAC Wi-Fi et l'adresse Bluetooth. Informations logicielles Permet de voir la version Android, la version de kernel, le numro de construction et la version du logiciel. Informations lgales Permet d'afficher les licences rgissant les logiciels code source libre et les donnes lgales de Google. 119 LG Backup propos de la sauvegarde et de la restauration des donnes de l'appareil Il est recommand de crer et d'enregistrer rgulirement un fichier de sauvegarde dans le stockage interne, en particulier avant toute mise jour logicielle. Vous pourrez ainsi rcuprer des donnes de l'appareil au cas o ce dernier venait tre perdu, vol ou endommag en raison d'un problme impromptu. L'application de sauvegarde LG est prise en charge par les smartphones et tablettes LG, d'autres logiciels ou d'autres versions du systme d'exploitation. De cette faon, lorsque vous achterez un nouveau tlphone intelligent ou une nouvelle tabletteLG, vous pourrez sauvegarder les donnes de votre appareil actuel et les restaurer sur le nouveau. Si l'application de sauvegarde est prinstalle sur votre tlphone intelligent ou sur votre tablette, vous pouvez sauvegarder et restaurer la plupart de vos donnes, y compris les applications tlcharges et pr-installes, les signets, les entres du calendrier, les contacts, les paramtres de l'cran d'accueil et les paramtres du systme. Vous pouvez galement:
Effectuer une sauvegarde LG manuelle de votre appareil. Programmer des sauvegardes automatiques de votre appareil. Restaurer les donnes de votre appareil. 120 REMARQUE: Veuillez noter que la fonction de sauvegarde ne prend pas en charge la sauvegarde des donnes de l'utilisateur ni celle des donnes multimdias (photos/vidos/musique). Veuillez effectuer une copie de sauvegarde de ces fichiers l'aide de Sync Mdia (MTP). Raccordez votre tablette et votre ordinateur au moyen d'un cble USB et touchez Synchronisation des mdias (MTP). Avertissement! Pour viter que votre tablette s'teigne de faon inattendue en cours de sauvegarde ou de restauration en raison d'une charge insuffisante de la batterie, veillez ce que celle-ci reste compltement charge pendant l'opration. Sauvegarde des donnes de votre tablette l'aide de l'application de sauvegarde LG 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
LG Backup
> Sauvegarder. 2 Cochez la case que vous souhaitez sauvegarder, puis slectionnez Suivant. 3 Sur l'cran Emplacement de la sauvegarde, touchez Stockage interne ou Carte SD, puis touchez Dmarrer. 4 Une fois tous les fichiers slectionns sauvegards, le message Sauvegarde termine s'affiche. 121 Planification de sauvegardes automatiques Vous pouvez aussi programmer des sauvegardes automatiques des donnes de votre tablette en fonction du paramtre de planification. Pour ce faire, procdez comme suit:
1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications
> onglet Applications >
LG Backup
> Sauvegarde planifie. 2 Touchez Elments sauvegards, puis cochez la case situe ct de l'lment que vous souhaitez sauvegarder. 3 Touchez Emplacement de sauvegarde, touchez Stockage interne ou Carte SD. 4 Touchez Rgler l'heure pour rgler la frquence sur Hebdo, Toutes les deux semaines, Mensuel et touchez pour activer. 5 Touchez le commutateur pour activer cette fonction. Restauration des donnes de la tablette REMARQUE: Tous les fichiers stocks sur votre tablette sont supprims avec la restauration du fichier de sauvegarde. 1 Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez Applications LG Backup
> Restaurer.
> onglet Applications >
2 Dans l'cran Restaurer, slectionnez le fichier de sauvegarde contenant les donnes que vous souhaitez restaurer. 3 Cochez la case situe ct de l'lment que vous souhaitez restaurer, puis slectionnez Suivant pour le restaurer sur votre tablette. 122 REMARQUE: noter que les donnes de votre tablette seront remplaces par le contenu de votre sauvegarde. 4 Si le fichier de sauvegarde est crypt, entrez le mot de passe que vous avez choisi pour le crypter. 5 Une fois tous les fichiers slectionns restaurs, la tablette redmarre automatiquement. REMARQUE: Vous pouvez activer la fonction Activer le cryptage pour crypter vos fichiers de sauvegarde et ainsi leur offrir une protection supplmentaire. dans l'cran LG Backup, puis saisissez un mot de passe et un Touchez indice au cas o vous oublieriez le mot de passe. Une fois le mot de passe dfini, vous devez l'entrer chaque fois que vous souhaitez sauvegarder ou restaurer. 123 Mise jour du logiciel de la tablette Mise jour du logiciel de la tablette Cette fonction vous permet de mettre jour le micrologiciel de votre tablette avec la dernire version depuis Internet sans avoir besoin de vous rendre dans un centre de service. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de cette fonction, visitez le site http://www.lg.com La mise jour du micrologiciel de l'appareil mobile ncessitant toute l'attention de l'utilisateur pendant toute la dure du processus de mise jour, assurez-vous de lire toutes les instructions et notes qui apparaissent chaque tape avant de continuer. noter que le retrait du cble USB ou de la batterie pendant la mise jour risque d'endommager gravement votre tablette. Mise niveau du logiciel de tabletteLG par liaison radio Cette fonction permet de mettre niveau le micrologiciel de votre tablette la version la plus rcente en utilisant la liaison radio, ce qui vous vite d'avoir vous connecter au moyen d'un cble de donnesUSB. Cette fonction n'est disponible que dans l'ventualit o LG mette disposition une version plus rcente du micrologiciel de votre appareil. Vous devez tout d'abord vrifier la version du logiciel de votre tablette:
Dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez la touche Menu propos de la tablette > Informations du logiciel. Pour effectuer la mise jour du logiciel de la tablette, dans l'cran d'accueil, touchez la touche Menu tablette > Centre de mises jour > Mise jour logiciel > Vrifiez maintenant pour actualiser.
> Paramtres systme > propos de la
> Paramtres systme >
124 REMARQUE: LG se rserve le droit, son entire discrtion, d'offrir des mises niveau du micrologiciel de certains modles seulement et ne donne aucune garantie quant la disponibilit de versions plus rcentes du micrologiciel de tous les modles. REMARQUE: Vos donnes personnelles pourraient tre effaces lors de la mise jour du logiciel de la tablette, y compris l'information de votre compte Google et de tous vos autres comptes, les donnes et paramtres de votre systme et de vos applications, ainsi que toutes les applications tlcharges et la licence DRM. Par consquent, LG recommande d'effectuer une sauvegarde de vos donnes personnelles avant de mettre jour le logiciel. LG n'assume aucune responsabilit relativement la perte de donnes personnelles. 125 Accessoires Ces accessoires sont disponibles pour l'utilisation avec votre tablette. (Les articles dcrits ci-dessous peuvent tre offerts en option.) Adaptateur de voyage Cble de donnes Guide de Dmarrage rapide REMARQUE:
Utilisez toujours des accessoires LG d'origine. Autrement, votre garantie pourrait tre annule. Les accessoires peuvent varier selon la rgion. 126 Dpannage Cette section dcrit certains problmes que vous pourriez prouver lors de l'utilisation de votre tablette. Vous pouvez corriger facilement la plupart de ces problmes, mais certains peuvent ncessiter que vous appeliez votre fournisseur de services. Message Aucune application ne peut tre configure Erreur de chargement Causes possibles Fonction non prise en charge par votre fournisseur de services ou abonnement requis. La batterie n'est pas charge. La temprature extrieure est trop leve ou trop faible. Problme de contact Aucune tension. Chargeur dfectueux Chargeur incorrect Mesures correctives possibles Communiquez avec votre fournisseur de services. Rechargez la batterie. Assurez-vous de charger la tablette des tempratures normales. Vrifiez le chargeur et sa connexion la tablette. Branchez le chargeur dans une autre prise. Remplacez le chargeur. Utilisez uniquement des accessoiresd'origine LG. 127 Message Impossible de recevoir/
d'envoyer des photos Causes possibles Mesures correctives possibles Mmoire pleine Supprimez certaines photos de la tablette Des fichiers ne s'ouvrent pas Type de fichier non pris en charge. Sans tonalit Mode de vibration Vrifiez les formats de fichiers pris en charge. Vrifiez les paramtres slectionns dans le menu Son et assurez-vous que l'appareil n'est pas en mode vibration ou silencieux. Communication coupe ou cran gel Problme intermittent du logiciel. Tentez d'effectuer une mise jour du logiciel sur le siteWeb. 128 GARANTIE LIMITE 1. CE QUI EST COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE LG garantit que lunit et les accessoires inclus sont exempts de toute dfectuosit de matriel et de fabrication, conformment aux modalits suivantes:
1. Cette garantie limite est valable pendant UN (1) an partir de la date dachat de ce produit par lutilisateur initial. 2. Cette garantie limite sadresse lutilisateur initial du produit et ne peut tre cde ou transmise aux acheteurs/utilisateurs subsquents. 3. Cette garantie nest valable que pour lutilisateur initial du produit pendant la priode de garantie, pour autant que lappareil soit utilis au Canada. 4. Sur demande de LG, le consommateur doit fournir une preuve de la date dachat. 5. Pendant la priode de garantie applicable, LG rparera ou remplacera, sa seule discrtion, sans frais pour lutilisateur initial, toutes pices du tablette et tous accessoires dfectueux. 6. LG peut utiliser des pices ou composantes remises neuf ou neuves pour rparer le produit, ou dcider de remplacer le produit par un produit remis neuf ou neuf. 2. CE QUI NEST PAS COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE 1. Les dfectuosits ou les dommages rsultant de lutilisation anormale ou inhabituelle du produit. 2. Les dfectuosits ou les dommages provenant dun usage anormal, de conditions anormales, dun entreposage inappropri, dune exposition lhumidit ou dun contact avec leau, de modifications non autorises, de connexions non autorises, de rparations non autorises, dun mauvais usage, de ngligence, dabus, dun accident, daltrations, dune installation inapproprie ou de tout autre acte dont la faute ne peut tre attribue LG, y compris les dommages causs par un contact avec de la nourriture ou des liquides. 3. Les bris ou dommages lantenne, moins quils ne soient directement causs par des dfectuosits de matriel ou de fabrication. 4. Les dfectuosits ou anomalies prsumes si le Service la clientle chez LG na pas t avis par lutilisateur initial durant la priode de la garantie limite en vigueur. 5. Les produits dont le numro de srie aurait t retir ou rendu illisible. 6. Les dommages rsultant de lusage daccessoires non approuvs par LG. 7. Toutes les surfaces en plastique et toutes les autres pices extrieures exposes qui sont griffes ou endommages suite un usage normal. 8. Les produits rpars par du personnel ou une entreprise non autoriss. Remarques:
1. Cette garantie limite remplace toutes les autres garanties, expresses et implicites au sens le plus large autoris par la loi, des actes lgislatifs ou autres, y compris, mais sans sy limiter, toute garantie implicite de qualit marchande et dadaptation un usage particulier. 2. Le transporteur est responsable des dommages qui peuvent subir les marchandises en cours dexpdition. 3. EXCLUSION DE RESPONSABILIT Aucune autre garantie expresse nest offerte avec ce produit. LA DURE DE TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VENDABILIT, SE LIMITE LA DURE DE LA PRSENTE GARANTIE EXPRESSE. LG ELECTRONICS CANADA, INC. NE SERA PAS TENU RESPONSABLE DE LA PERTE DUSAGE DE CE PRODUIT, DE TOUS INCONVNIENTS, PERTES OU AUTRES DOMMAGES, DIRECTS OU CONSCUTIFS, SURVENANT DE LUTILISATION OU DE LINAPTITUDE UTILISER CE PRODUIT, AINSI QUE DE TOUTE AUTRE VIOLATION DUNE GARANTIE EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE QUELLE QUELLE SOIT, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VENDABILIT APPLICABLE CE PRODUIT. 4. POUR OBTENIR UN SERVICE SOUS GARANTIE Pour obtenir un service sous garantie, composez le numro de tlphone suivant partir de nimporte quel endroit au Canada:
LG Electronics Canada, Inc. Tl. 1-888-LG-Canada (1-888-542-2623) http://www.lg.com/ca_fr/aider/aider-mobile Electronics Canada Inc. North York, Ontario Printed in China
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2016-05-03 | 5755 ~ 5795 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2014-05-29 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
3 | JBC - Part 15 Class B Computing Device/Personal Computer | |||
4 | 5510 ~ 5670 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
5 | 5755 ~ 5795 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
6 | 2014-04-22 | 5755 ~ 5795 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
7 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
8 | 5510 ~ 5670 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
9 | JBC - Part 15 Class B Computing Device/Personal Computer |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Effective |
2016-05-03
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
2014-05-29
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
2014-04-22
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
LG Electronics USA, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0020917688
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Physical Address |
1000 Sylvan Ave.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
Englewood Cliffs, NJ
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Grantee Code |
ZNF
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Equipment Product Code |
V700
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Name |
K**** H******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Title |
Director, Standards & Compliance
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Telephone Number |
201-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Fax Number |
201-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
k******@lge.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Name |
R**** O******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Physical Address |
6660-B Dobbin Road
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
Columbia, Maryland 21045
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 07/17/2014 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | JBC - Part 15 Class B Computing Device/Personal Computer | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Portable Tablet with WLAN and Bluetooth | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change Power output is conducted. The highest reported SAR for this device is 0.57 W/kg. This device complies with the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements of Report and Order FCC 06-96 as a Client only without Radar Detection. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change Output power is conducted. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change Power output is conducted. The highest reported SAR for this device is 0.57 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change Power output is peak conducted. The highest reported SAR for this device is 1.00 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Power output is peak conducted. The highest reported SAR for this device is 1.00 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Power output is conducted. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Power output is conducted. The highest reported SAR for this device is 0.57 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Firm Name |
HCT Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
HCT Co., LTD
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Name |
L****** Y****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
S******** L******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Telephone Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
82-31********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Fax Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
y******@hct.co.kr
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
s******@HCT.co.kr
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5700 | 0.011 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5670 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.014 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0080000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15B | 16 CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5700 | 0.011 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 15E | CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 6 | 15E | CC | 5510 | 5670 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.062 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.001 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | 15C | CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.049 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.062 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.001 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 3 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 4 | 15C | CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.049 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0080000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5700 | 0.011 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 5 | 15E | CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 6 | 15E | CC | 5510 | 5670 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 15B | 16 CC |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC